Sony Ericsson Cell Phone GM47 User Manual

GM47/GM48

Product Photo/Illustration

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Part 1: Overview................................................................................................. 11

1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 13

1.1 Target Users

1.2 Prerequisites

......................................................................................... 13

1.3 Manual Structure ......................................................................................... 13

2. GM47/GM48 Module s ........................................................................................... 15

2.1 About the GM47/GM48 Family .................................................................. 15

2.2 GM47 in a Communication Syste m ............................................................. 15

2.3 Features

2.3.1

......................................................................................... 17

Types of Mobile Station .................................................................. 17

Short Message Servic e .................................................................... 18

Voice Call s ...................................................................................... 18

Data................................................................................................. 18

SIM Card......................................................................................... 19

Average Power Consumption ......................................................... 19

Other Feature s ................................................................................ 19

2.4 Service and Support ..................................................................................... 19

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3

Web Pages....................................................................................... 19

Integrator’s Manual........................................................................ 19

Developer’s Ki t ............................................................................... 20

2.5 Precautions

......................................................................................... 20

3. Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 21

Part 2: Developer’s Ki t ....................................................................................... 23

1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 25

1.1 Overview

......................................................................................... 25

1.2 Contents of the Kit ....................................................................................... 25

1.3 General Functioning of the Kit .................................................................... 26

2. Using the Developer’s Kit...................................................................................... 29

2.1 Start up Check List....................................................................................... 30

2.2 Developer’s Board Overlay.......................................................................... 31

2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connector s .............................................................. 32

2.4 System Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................ 36

Part 3: Integrating the Module............................................................................ 37

1. Mechanical Descriptio n ......................................................................................... 39

1.1 Interface Description.................................................................................... 39

1.2 Physical Dimension s .................................................................................... 40

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2. System Connector Interface ..................................................................................41

2.1 Overview

.......................................................................................... 41

2.2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics ............................................ 44

2.2.1

2.3 Grounds

2.3.1

General Protection Requirement s ...................................................44

.......................................................................................... 45

Analogue Ground - AGN D ..............................................................45

Digital Ground - DGND..................................................................45

2.3.2

2.4 VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input ......................................................... 45

2.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signal ............................................................ 46

2.5.1

2.5.2

Switching the module ON and OFF ................................................46

VIO - 2.75V Supply..........................................................................47

2.6 Analogue Audio .......................................................................................... 48

Audio To Mobile Station - ATMS ....................................................48

Audio From Mobile Station - AFMS ...............................................49

Microphone Signals.........................................................................50

Speaker Signals ...............................................................................51

2.7 PCM Digital Audio....................................................................................... 52

2.7.1 PCM Data Format...........................................................................53

2.8 Serial Data Interfaces.................................................................................... 55

UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI..............55

Serial Data Signals - RD, T D ..........................................................56

Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI ...................................56

UART2 - TD2, RD2 .........................................................................58

UART3 - TD3, RD3 (designated for future use)..............................59

2.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCE ....................................................60

2.10 Service/Programmin g ................................................................................... 61

2.11 Buzzer

2.12 LED

.......................................................................................... 61

2.13 General Purpose Digital I/O Port s ................................................................ 62

2.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O Ports............................................................ 63

2.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DAC.............................................63

2.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCx ........................64

2.15 External I C Serial Control Bus .................................................................. 65

2.16 TX_ON - Burst Transmission....................................................................... 65

2.17 Real Time Clock .......................................................................................... 66

3. Antenna Connector ................................................................................................68

4. Hints for Integrating the Module..........................................................................69

4.1 Safety Advice and Precaution s ..................................................................... 69

4.1.1

4.1.2

4.1.3

Genera l ............................................................................................69

SIM Card .........................................................................................69

Antenna............................................................................................70

4.2 Installation of the Module............................................................................. 70

4.2.1

4.2.2

4.3 Antenna

Where to Install the Module ............................................................70

How to Install the Modul e ...............................................................71

.......................................................................................... 72

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General ........................................................................................... 72

Antenna Type .................................................................................. 73

Antenna Placement ......................................................................... 73

The Antenna Cable.......................................................................... 73

Possible Communication Disturbance s .......................................... 74

5. Technical Data........................................................................................................ 75

6. Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................... 77

7. FCC Certificate ...................................................................................................... 78

Part 4: Using AT Commands.............................................................................. 79

1. Introduction to AT Commands ............................................................................ 81

1.1 Overview

......................................................................................... 81

1.2 Syntax Descriptio n ....................................................................................... 81

1.2.1

1.2.2

1.2.3

Conventions..................................................................................... 81

AT Command Syntax....................................................................... 82

AT Response Synta x ........................................................................ 84

1.3 Error Codes

......................................................................................... 85

1.3.1

1.3.2

+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)........................... 85

+CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) ................ 86

1.4

Examples on How to Use the AT Commands ............................................ 87

1.5 SMS Text Mode ......................................................................................... 87

1.6 GPRS Communicatio n ................................................................................. 89

2. Call Control ............................................................................................................ 91

PIN Control...................................................................... 91

Answer Incoming Cal l ..................................................... 91

Dial .................................................................................. 92

Hang up............................................................................ 94

Monitor Speaker Loudnes s .............................................. 94

Return to Online Data Mode............................................ 95

Select Pulse Dialling........................................................ 95

Select Tone Dialling ........................................................ 95

Call Progress Monitoring Control ................................... 96

Hang up Cal l .................................................................... 96

Call Mode ........................................................................ 97

Voice Hang-U p ................................................................ 98

DTMF and Tone Generation ........................................... 98

3. Control and Status ............................................................................................... 101

Result Code Suppression ............................................... 101

Automatic Answer Control............................................ 101

Escape Sequence Character ........................................... 102

Command Line Termination Characte r ......................... 102

Response Formatting Character..................................... 103

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) ...... 104

Blind Dial Delay Control ............................................... 104

Connection Completion Timeou t ................................... 105

Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control ............................ 105

Automatic Disconnect Delay Control ............................ 106

Ericsson Call Monitoring ............................................... 106

Ericsson Daylight Saving Time ..................................... 108

Ericsson Master Rese t .................................................... 109

Ericsson Pin Event ......................................................... 110

Ericsson Settings Minute Minder................................... 110

Set Alarm ....................................................................... 111

Alarm Delete .................................................................. 112

Set Clock and Date......................................................... 113

Extended Error Report ................................................... 114

Set Phone Functionality ................................................. 114

Indicator Control ............................................................ 115

List all available AT Commands.................................... 116

Mobile Equipment Error ................................................ 116

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting .............................. 117

Phone Activity Statu s ..................................................... 118

PIN Control .................................................................... 120

Change Password ........................................................... 122

Service Reporting Control.............................................. 124

Cellular Result Code ...................................................... 124

Save Setting s .................................................................. 125

Signal Strengt h ............................................................... 126

Automatic Time Zone Update........................................ 127

4. Audio......................................................................................................................129

4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification ................... 129

M2M Audio Profile Manipulation ................................. 135

Ericsson Audio Line Request......................................... 137

Ericsson Audio Mode Selection..................................... 138

Ericsson Audio Ring Signa l ........................................... 139

Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable....................... 140

Ericsson Local Audio Mode........................................... 140

Ericsson Microphone Mode ........................................... 141

Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request ...................... 141

Ericsson Personal Ring Type Rea d ................................ 142

Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write ................................. 143

Ericsson Ring Level Se t ................................................. 145

Ericsson Ring Set ........................................................... 146

Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command..................... 147

Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound ................................ 148

Ericsson Settings Own Melod y ...................................... 148

Ericsson Set External Volume Control .......................... 150

Monitor Speaker Control................................................ 151

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Data - CSD/HSCSD.............................................................................................. 153

5.1 AT+CBST

5.2 AT+CRLP

Select Bearer Service Type............................................ 153

Radio Link Protocol....................................................... 155

6. Data - GPRS ......................................................................................................... 157

6.1 AT+CGACT

6.2 AT+CGATT

PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............................. 157

GPRS Attach or Detac h ................................................. 158

6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State ............................................................. 159

6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context ...................................................... 160

6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reportin g .................................................. 162

6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address........................................................ 163

6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) ....... 164

6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested).......................... 166

6.9 AT+CGREG

6.10 AT+CGSMS

GPRS Network Registration Statu s ............................... 169

Select Service for MO SMS Message s .......................... 170

7. Data - HSCSD....................................................................................................... 171

HSCSD Current Call Parameters................................... 171

HSCSD Device Parameters ........................................... 172

HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration ............... 173

HSCSD Parameters Report............................................ 174

HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading................ 175

8. GPS Interoperability ........................................................................................... 177

8.1 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2 ................................... 177

8.2 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate.................. 178

9. Fax ......................................................................................................................... 181

9.1 AT*E2FAX

Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modificatio n .... 181

9.2 Low Level Fax Command s ........................................................................ 182

10. Identification ........................................................................................................ 183

Attention Command....................................................... 183

Set to Factory Defined Configuration............................ 183

Store User Profile .......................................................... 183

List all Supported AT Commands ................................. 184

Read MS Manufacturer Identificatio n ........................... 184

Read MS Model Identification ...................................... 184

Read MS Revision Identification................................... 185

Read MS Product Serial Number Identificatio n ............ 186

Read Manufacturer Identification.................................. 186

Read Model Identification ............................................. 187

Read Revision Identification ......................................... 187

Identification Information.............................................. 188

11. Input/Output ........................................................................................................ 191

11.1 AT*E2IO

Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write ...................... 191

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

12. Interface ................................................................................................................197

PIN Control .................................................................... 197

Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ............................................ 197

Circuit 108 (DTR) Response.......................................... 197

Circuit 107 (DSR) Respons e .......................................... 197

Mode Selection............................................................... 198

Command Ech o .............................................................. 198

DCE Response Forma t ................................................... 199

Reset to Default Configuration ...................................... 200

Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol ............................... 200

Restore SMS Settings..................................................... 202

Cable Interface Character Format .................................. 202

DTE-DCE Local Flow Control ...................................... 203

Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting............................ 204

Cable Interface Port Comman d ...................................... 204

Serial Peripheral Interface.............................................. 205

M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time.............................. 207

13. Network .................................................................................................................209

Ericsson M2M Cell Description..................................... 209

Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode.............. 211

M2M Service Provider Indication.................................. 217

Ericsson Request ALS Status......................................... 217

Ericsson Customer Service Profile................................. 218

Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network.......................... 219

Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Networ k ......................... 220

Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number ............................... 221

Ericsson Set Line Nam e ................................................. 222

Subscriber Identification ................................................ 223

Facility Lock .................................................................. 223

Subscriber Number......................................................... 225

Connected Line Identification Presentatio n ................... 226

Operator Selection.......................................................... 228

Network Registration ..................................................... 229

Ciphering Indicator ........................................................ 230

Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS ..................................... 232

14. Phoneboo k .............................................................................................................235

Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum ......................... 235

Ericsson Add to Group................................................... 235

Ericsson Create Group ................................................... 236

Ericsson Set Credit Card Numbe r .................................. 237

Ericsson Delete Group ................................................... 239

Ericsson Delete Group Ite m ........................................... 239

Ericsson Group Read...................................................... 240

Ericsson Group Item Read ............................................. 240

Ericsson Silence Command............................................ 241

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ericsson Settings Number.............................................. 242

Phonebook Fin d ............................................................. 243

Phonebook Read ............................................................ 243

Phone Storage ................................................................ 245

Phonebook Write ........................................................... 246

Ericsson Callers Allowed Write ................................... 247

Ericsson Callers Allowed Read ..................................... 248

15. Short Message Services - Point to Point............................................................. 251

PIN Control.................................................................... 251

Select Service for MO SMS Message s .......................... 251

Preferred Message Storage ............................................ 251

Service Centre Address.................................................. 253

Message Format............................................................. 254

Write Message to Memory ............................................ 255

Send Message ................................................................ 257

Send From Storage ........................................................ 260

Send Command.............................................................. 262

New Message Indications to T E .................................... 264

Read Message ................................................................ 268

List Message .................................................................. 274

Delete Messag e .............................................................. 280

Show Text Mode Parameters......................................... 280

Set Text Mode Parameters............................................. 281

Select Character Se t ....................................................... 282

Select Message Service.................................................. 283

15.18 AT*E2SMSRI Ring indicator for SMS.................................................. 284

16. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcas t ........................................................... 287

16.1 AT+CNMI

16.2 AT+CSCB

New Message Indications to T E .................................... 287

Select Cell Broadcast Message Type............................. 287

17. SIM Application Toolkit...................................................................................... 289

17.1 AT+CPIN

PIN Control.................................................................... 289

SIM Application Toolkit Settings.................................. 289

M2M STK Display Tex t ................................................ 290

M2M STK Get Inkey..................................................... 291

M2M STK Get Input ..................................................... 293

M2M STK Select Item................................................... 296

17.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu ............................................... 298

M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)......................... 300

M2M STK Set Up Cal l .................................................. 300

STK Send Short Message .............................................. 302

STK Send SS ................................................................. 303

STK Send USSD............................................................ 304

STK Refresh .................................................................. 305

17.14 AT*E2STKTO SIM Application Toolkit Settings.................................. 305

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

18. Supplementary Services.......................................................................................307

PIN Control .................................................................... 307

Accumulated Call Meter ................................................ 307

Accumulated Call Meter Maximum............................... 308

Advice of Charge ........................................................... 309

Price Per Unit and Currency Table ................................ 310

Ericsson Divert Function................................................ 311

Identity Presentation Set ................................................ 312

Ericsson Line Set............................................................ 313

M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch ......................... 313

M2M Supplementary Service Indications...................... 314

Call Forwarding number and Condition s ....................... 319

Call Waiting ................................................................... 321

Call Hold and Multiparty ............................................... 323

Calling Line Identification ............................................. 325

Calling Line Identification Restriction........................... 326

Supplementary Service Notification .............................. 328

Unstructured Supplementary Service Data .................... 330

19. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands..............................................................333

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part 1: Overview

Product Photo/Illustration

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Introduction

1.1 Target Users

GM47 and GM48 modules are designed to be integrated into machine-

to-machine or man-to-machine communications applications. They are

intended to be used by manufacturers, system integrators, applications

developers and developers of wireless communications equipment.

1.2 Prerequisites

It is assumed that the person integrating the GM47 or GM48 into an

application has a basic understanding of the following:

• GSM networking;

• Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);

• AT commands;

• ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;

• Micro controllers and programming;

• Electronic hardware design.

1.3 Manual Structure

The manual is composed of four parts:

Part 1- Overview

This section provides a broad overview of the GM47/GM48 family and

includes a list of abbreviations used in the manual.

Part 2 - Developer’s Kit

This section lists the contents of the whole development kit and

provides the information to setup and use the equipment.

Part 3 - Integrating the Module

This section describes each of the signals available on the GM47/GM48

modules, along with mechanical information. The section also provides

you with design guidelines and explains what is needed to

commercialise an application from a regulatory point of view.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Part 4 - Using AT Commands

This section lists all the AT commands relevant to the GM47 and

GM48, including their required parameters. The purpose of part 4 is to

give you detailed information on the function of the AT command set.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. GM47/GM48 MODULES

2. GM47/GM48 Modules

2.1 About the GM47/GM48 Family

Two modules make up the family; GM47 and GM48, for use in the

900/1800MHz and 850/1900MHz GSM bands respectively.

Note!

As the characteristics of the modules are quite similar, this manual only

refers to the GM48 where a difference exists; by default all other

references are to the GM47.

The products belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson modules, and

are intended to be used in machine-to-machine applications and man-to-

machine applications. They are used when there is a need to send and

receive data (by SMS, CSD, HSCSD, or GPRS), and make voice calls

over the GSM network.

GM47 modules are not “stand alone” devices; they are used as the

engine in an application created by the customer. A typical application,

involves a micro-controller and GM47 module, in which the micro-

controller sends AT commands to the module via an RS232

communications link.

2.2 GM47 in a Communication System

Figure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communication

system using the GM47. It also shows the communication principles of

the system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in this

manual, are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.

• The MS (mobile station) represents the GM47 module plus SIM

card. The module excluding SIM card, is known as the ME (mobile

equipment).

• The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a computer)

and is a part of the application.

Wireless Communication System

GSM Network

Application

ME status, responses

(DTE)

(GM47)

AT commands to control MS

Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

In accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (International

Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation

Sector) V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface.

The functions of the GM47 follow the recommendations provided by

ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and ITU-T.

ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element

of the module; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson

specific commands.

To find out how to work with AT commands, see “Part 4: Using AT

Commands”, page 79.

Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the module and the

application. The entire System Connector Interface is described in

detail in “System Connector Interface”, page 41.

Signals

and power

Antenna

connector

(GM47)

(Application)

60 pin

system connector

Figure 2.2 The Interface between the Module and the Application

Note!

ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)

and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment) respectively.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. GM47/GM48 MODULES

2.3 Features

The module performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM

standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The functions of the module are

implemented by issuing AT commands over a serial interface.

2.3.1 Types of Mobile Station

GM47 and GM48 are dual band mobile stations with the characteristics

shown in the tables below.

GM47

GSM900

E-GSM900

GSM1800

Frequency Range (MHz)

TX: 890-915

RX: 935-960

TX: 880-890

RX: 925-935

TX: 1710-1785

RX: 1805-1880

Channel spacing

200kHz

Number of channels

173 carriers *8 (TDMA)

GSM: channels 1 to 124

E-GSM: channels 975 to 1023

374 carriers *8 (TDMA)

DCS: channels 512 to 885

Modulation

GMSK

TX phase accuracy

Duplex spacing

< 5º RMS phase error (burst)

45MHz

< 5º RMS phase error (burst)

95MHz

Receiver sensitivity at

antenna connector

< –102dBm

Transmitter output power

at antenna connector

Class 4

2W (33dBm)

Class 1

1W (30dBm)

Automatic hand-over between GSM 900 and GSM1800

GM48

GSM850

GSM1900

Frequency Range (MHz)

TX: 824-849

RX: 869-894

TX: 1850-1910

RX: 1930-1990

Channel spacing

200kHz

123 carriers *8 (TDMA)

GSM: channels 128 to 251

298 carriers *8 (TDMA)

PCS: channels 512 to 810

Number of channels

Modulation

GMSK

TX Phase Accuracy

Duplex spacing

< 5º RMS phase error (burst)

45MHz

< 5º RMS phase error (burst)

80MHz

Receiver sensitivity at

antenna connector

< –102dBm

Transmitter output power

at antenna connector

Class 5

0.8W (29dBm)

Class 1

1W (30dBm)

Automatic hand-over between GSM850 and GSM1900

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.3.2 Short Message Service

The module supports the following SMS services:

• Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol data

unit) and text mode supported.

• Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text mode

supported.

• CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is sent

to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSM

network (for example, traffic reports).

• SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.

• SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40.

The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using

7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 characters.

The module supports concatenated messages to extend this function. It

is disabled if CNMI 3,2 is set (See “AT+CNMI New Message

Indications to TE”, page 264).

2.3.3 Voice Calls

The GM47 offers the capability of mobile originated and mobile

terminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls.

Multi-party, call waiting and call deflection features are available.

Some of these features are network-operator specific.

For the inter-connection of audio, the module offers both single ended

and balanced analogue input and output lines. Direct interface to the

digital PCM (pulse code modulation) bus used within the module is

available, thus by-passing the internal analogue circuitry.

2.3.4 Data

The module supports the following data protocols:

• GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)

Modules are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneous

activation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. GM47

modules are GPRS 4+1 enabled devices, which are capable of

transmitting in one timeslot per frame (up link), and receiving at a

maximum of four timeslots per frame (down link).

• CSD (Circuit Switched Data)

GM47 modules are capable of establishing a CSD communication at

9.6kbps.

• HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data).

GM47 supports HSCSD communication, with one timeslot per

frame capacity in the up link and two timeslots per frame capacity in

the down link (2+1).

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. GM47/GM48 MODULES

2.3.5 SIM Card

An external SIM card with 3V or 5V technology, can be connected to

the module via its 60-pin system connector.

2.3.6 Average Power Consumption

Idle Mode

Transmit/Operation

Voice/CSD

<5mA

<250mA (<2A peak)

<350mA (<2A peak)

<250mA (<1.75A peak)

<350mA (<1.75A peak)

GSM850 and GSM900

Data (GPRS 4+1)

Voice/CSD

GSM1800 and GSM1900

Data (GPRS 4+1)

Note!

The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximum

transmitted power.

2.3.7 Other Features

These include:

• 07.10 multiplexing.

• GPS interoperability.

• SIM application tool kit.

2.4 Service and Support

2.4.1 Web Pages

Visit our web site for the following information:

• where to buy modules or for recommendations concerning

accessories and components;

• the telephone number for customer support in your region;

• FAQs (frequently asked questions).

The web site address is:

http://www.sonyericsson.com/M2M

2.4.2 Integrator’s Manual

This manual provides you with all of the information you need to

integrate the module into your application.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.4.3 Developer’s Kit

Sony Ericsson provides the opportunity for designers to test the module

on a limited scale using its Developer’s Kit. The kit includes the

necessary accessories (software and hardware) required to build and test

an application. It includes the following:

• GSM module, GM47 or GM48;

• This integrator’s manual;

• Software developer’s kit and manual;

• Developer’s kit hardware.

All the user needs to provide, is a computer or micro-controller and the

expertise to use AT commands.

2.5 Precautions

GM47 and GM48 modules are static sensitive devices (SSDs). Normal

SSD procedures for electronic devices should be used when handling

the modules. In “Part 3: Integrating the Module”, page 37 you will find

more information about safety and product care. Do not exceed the

environmental and electrical limits as specified in “Technical Data”,

page 75.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. ABBREVIATIONS

3. Abbreviations

Abbreviation

Explanations

Cell Broadcast Message

CBM

CBS

CSD

DCE

DTE

Cell Broadcast Service

Circuit Switched Data

Data Circuit Terminating Equipment

Data Terminal Equipment

Dual Tone Multi Frequency

Enhanced Full Rate

DTMF

EFR

EMC

ETSI

Electro-Magnetic Compatibility

European Telecommunication Standards Institute

Full Rate

GPRS

GPS

GSM

General Packet Radio Service

Global Positioning System

Global System for Mobile Communication

Half Rate

HSCSD

ITU-T

High Speed Circuit Switched Data

International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications

Standardisation Sector

Mobile Equipment

Mobile Originated

Mobile Station

Mobile Terminated

Pulse Code Modulation

Protocol Data Unit

Radio Link Protocol

Radio Frequency

PCM

PDU

RLP

RTC

SDP

SIM

SMS

Real Time Clock

Service Discovery Protocol

Subscriber Identity Module

Short Message Service

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Abbreviation

Explanations

Terminal Adapter

Terminal Equipment

Third Harmonic Distortion

Telecom Services

THD

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part 2: Developer’s Kit

Product Photo/Illustration

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Introduction

1.1 Overview

The developer’s kit is designed to get you started quickly. It contains all

the hardware you will need to begin the development of an application.

The only items you need to provide are; a computer or micro controller,

a SIM card and network subscription, and a knowledge of programming

with AT commands.

Note!

Before connecting up and using the developer’s kit, we strongly

recommend you read “Part 3: Integrating the Module”, page 37 and all

of this section. There are many switches, jumpers and connector options

in the developer’s kit. A knowledge of the functionality of the GM47

module is therefore essential before you start altering the hardware

settings.

The main hardware in the developer’s kit is a screened box, containing

a board onto which you plug the GM47 module. Connectors, switches,

jumpers and SIM card holder are provided to allow you to configure and

access all the functions of the module.

1.2 Contents of the Kit

Please take the time to check the contents of your kit against the list

shown below. If any of the items are missing contact your supplier

immediately.

Developer’s kit - Part Number DPY 102 218

Contents:

Description

Product Number

Qty

Radio modem:

GM47 module or

GM48 module

DPY 102 201

DPY 102 204

GM47/GM48 developer’s kit (screened

box and development board)

KRY 101 1907

Switched mode PSU 12V d.c.

UK mains plug

EPA-121DA-12

EN90POWERLEADUK

EN90POWERLEADEU

European mains plug

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

Product Number

Qty

Cable with connector/cable serial 9-9 PIN

Portable handsfree

DB9(M)-DB9(F)

2002-1-24

Quad band antenna

RG174

Data carrier/CD-ROM containing:

Software Manual;

Integrator’s Manual

LZY 213 1319

1.3 General Functioning of the Kit

The following block diagrams are provided to help you understand the

general principles of operation of the developer’s kit.

You have the following options as shown in Figure 1.1:

• Connect the GM47 internally, direct to J4 or position it externally

and connect to J10 via a flat cable.

• Use the kit’s connectors to access and control the GM47 (all

switches and jumpers in their default positions).

• Access and control the GM47 directly via J12 and a flat cable. This

allows you to selectively bypass any circuits contained on the board,

and test your own application.

Pin header

60 pins male

1.27mm pitch

J12

Pins connected in parallel

External

Application

J11

J10

User selectable

jumpers

fit direct to J4

GM47

alternate flat cable to J10

Developer's

board circuits

and ports

Pin headers

60 pins female

1.27mm pitch

Pin header

60 pins male

2.54mm pitch

Developer's board

Figure 1.1 Module connections to the developer’s board

Figure 1.2 shows the various on-board voltages and how they are fed to

the GM47 and other circuitry. The developer’s board is powered by an

external power supply connected to Vcc.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. INTRODUCTION

5V to development

board circuits

Switched

when VIO

present

VIO present

LED

2V7

To development

board & interface

circuits

reg.

2V7

reg.

VIO

GM47

3V8

VCC

3V8

reg.

12v

Vcc

DC Power Socket,

Input 10..15V

TP4 TP5

Figure 1.2 Power supply connection and the on-board voltages

Figure 1.3, Figure 1.4 and Figure 1.5 show how various signals are

routed on the developer’s board. Thicker lines indicate multiple signals.

J12

VIO

General purpose I/O

LED

STATUS LED

(Blinks when

connected to network)

ON/OFF

SERVICE

I²C

SW4

ON/OFF

GM47

2V7

SERVICE LED

(Lit when SW4 closed)

n/c

VRTC

SIM

0.22F

Selectable

Jumpers

SIM holder with

SIM presence

switch (to DGND)

U10 SIM

Figure 1.3 Miscellaneous signals, connection and routing

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

J12

ATMS

AFMS

(Audio out)

(Audio in)

EAR

3.5mm socket

MIC

3.5mm socket

MICN, MICP, BEARN, BEARP

GM47

Handset

RJ11 connector

Buzzer

PCM

Buzzer

PCM

Selectable

Jumpers

8 pin Mini-DIN

Figure 1.4 Audio signals, connection and routing

J12

TD, RD, DTR, DCD,

RTS, CTS, RI

UART1 (EDB)

TD2, RD2 & SERVICE

TD3 & RD3

GM47

UART2 (ACB)

UART3

Selectable

jumpers

Level shifters

Figure 1.5 Comms signals, connection and routing

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT

2. Using the Developer’s Kit

This section provides you with the information needed to setup and use

the developer’s kit. Before changing switch and jumper settings, refer

to “2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors”, page 32.

Front and rear views of the developer’s kit are shown below. To access

the inside, remove the 8 screws on the top of the box and the cover plate.

48 Developer's Kit

GM47/GM

SET

EAR

MIC

Vcc

ON/OF

VIO

OFF

APP

OFF

Figure 2.1 Front view

UAR

Figure 2.2 Rear view

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.1 Start up Check List

To use the developer’s kit in standard format check the following:

• With the case lid removed, make sure the GM47 module is plugged

into J4 and the RF lead is connected to the rear of the module;

• Add your SIM card;

• Check the jumpers are in their default positions. Refer to Figure 2.3;

• Connect the serial cable between your computer and UART1 on the

rear panel;

• Connect the antenna to the RF connector on the rear panel;

• Connect the audio equipment if required;

• Plug the external power supply into the socket marked 12v on the

front panel;

• Switch Vcc to ON;

• Push ON/OFF for at least 2 seconds until the yellow VIO LED is on.

Your developer’s kit should now be operational and ready to receive AT

commands.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT

2.2 Developer’s Board Overlay

Figure 2.3 shows the developer’s board, including the position of all the

connectors, switches and jumpers (default positions). You will notice

that many jumpers are labelled “SW”. This is because the board was

previously fitted with DIL switches.

UART2

(ACB)

UART1

(EDB)

UART3

Ground stud

RF connector

U10

SIM

Holder

TP5 TP4

VCC

SIM test

connector

J11

J12

SW8

SW1

J10

SW9

SW11

SW7

SW6

SW3

SW5

JP18

JP21

SW10

JP24

SW4

12v Vcc

DC Power NC/OFF/ON

DCIO

Maintain in

ON/OFF

(module)

Handset

PCM

MIC

EAR

Audio in Audio out

(ATMS) (AFMS)

Socket,

Input

10..15V d.c.

power to

module

OFF position

(Not used with this module.

Only present for backward

compatibility)

Figure 2.3 Developer’s board overlay

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors

You will notice that many jumpers are labelled “SW”. This is because

the board was previously fitted with DIL switches. All jumpers are

located on the developer’s board (see “Developer’s board overlay”,

page 31).

Jumper

Signal

Setting

JP18

Maintain jumper in

lower default position

JP21 JP18

JP21

JP24

Maintain jumper in

lower default position

Reserved for

future use

MUST remain open to prevent

damage to the module. As an extra

precaution, maintain DCIO in the OFF

position

SW4

SERVICE

Connect the pins using the floating

connector ONLY when programming

the module or logging data

SW1, SW3, SW5,

SW6, SW7, SW8,

SW9, SW10,

See diagram

below

Default positions shown below. Move

any “SW” jumper to the right-hand

position to divert the signal to

connector J12. Remove the J11 links

to bypass J8, J9 or CP1 and process

audio signals externally

SW11, J11 links

J11

SIMRST

SIMCLK

SCL

ON/OFF

PRESENCE

SIMVCC

SIMDAT

SDA

SW8

SW1

SW9

SW6

SW3

SW5

BUZZER

LED

DCD

VRTC

DTR

CTS

RD3 (RX3)

TD3 (TX3)

RTS

RD (DFMS)

The links shown

on J11 must be

in place to

SW11

SW7

PCMULD

PCMIN

TD (DTMS)

RD2 (CFMS)

TD2 (CTMS)

PCMDLD

access audio

on J8, J9 or CP1

PCMOUT

PCMCLK

BEARP

SERVICE

AFMS

PCMSYN

MICN

MICP

ATMS

BEARN

SW10

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT

All switches are mounted on the front panel of the developer’s box.

Switch

Description

Operation

Vcc

Toggle switch

Switches power from external power supply to

module. Has three positions; NC, OFF and ON.

Switch to ON to connect power to the module

ON/OFF

DCIO

Push button

switch

Switches module on and off. To power up the

module, push button for at least 2 seconds,

until the yellow VIO LED is on. Repeat the

process to turn the module off

Toggle switch

Maintain in OFF position. Included only for

backwards compatibility

Connector

Description

Connections

UART1

(EDB)

9-way

Full 9-pin RS232 communication port. Used

during run-time to communicate with the

module (AT-commands, data transmission,

etc.)

D socket

(accessible

on the rear

panel)

DCD

RTS

CTS

DTR

UART2

(ACB)

9-way

3 line RS232 communications port

(+SERVICE). Used during service and

maintenance operations. Also used to

download new software to the module

D socket

(accessible

on the rear

panel)

RD2

SERVICE

TD2

UART3

9-way

3 line serial port. RS232 levels

D socket

(accessible

on the rear

panel)

RD3

TD3

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Connector

Description

Connections

Handset

RJ11 socket

Connector for a standard telephone

handset. As PCM paths are open inside the

module, a default short circuit is made

between PCMDLD-PCMIN and PCMULD-

PCMOUT signals on test connector J11 to

enable analogue audio in downlink and

uplink directions. Jumpers are in place

between pins 48 & 50 and between pins 47

& 49

1 2 3 4

Pin #

Signal

MICN

BEARN

BEARP

MICP

PCM

8 pin mini-DIN

connector

Carries PCM signals

Pin #

Signal

VIO (2.75V d.c. output)

PCMULD

PCMDLD

PCMCLK

PCMSYNC

DGND

PCMIN

PCMOUT

DGND

SYSTEM

Allows direct connection of the module to

the development board (see Figure 2.3,

page 31)

connector

SIM card test

connector

Connector to gain access to the SIM card

signals, which are connected in parallel with

U10

Pin #

Signal

SIMVCC

SIMRST

SIMCLK

SIMDAT

SIMPRESENCE

SIMGND

U10

EAR

SIM Holder

Connector for SIM card. Signals are also

present at test connector J5, described

above

3.5mm2-pole Audio output (unbalanced) or Audio From

jack socket

Mobile Station (AFMS). Make sure jumpers

are in place between pins 48 & 50 and

between pins 47 & 49

ground signal

MIC

3.5mm2-pole Audio input (unbalanced) or Audio To

jack socket

Mobile Station (ATMS). Signal source must

be AC-coupled as a bias voltage for

electret microphones is provided

(2.0 - 2.5Vd.c.). Make sure Jumpers are in

place between pins 48 & 50 and between

pins 47 & 49

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT

Connector

Description

Connections

J10

SYSTEM

connector

For optional flat cable connection between

the module and the development board

(see Figure 2.3, page 31)

J11

TEST

connector

60 pin, 2.54mm pitch, dual row pin header

that carries all signals present at the system

connector of the module. Used for easy

testing of the signals (see Figure 2.4,

page 36)

J12

Application

connector

For flat cable connection between a host

application and the module. Most of the

signals pass through jumpers that allow the

developer to select whether a specific

signal is routed to/from the development

board or to/from the host application. If no

application is connected to J12, these

jumpers (SW1, SW3, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8,

SW9, SW10 & SW11) serve as on/off switches

for the module signals (see Figure 2.3,

page 31)

12v

2.1mm DC

Allows connection of an

Power Socket external power supply.

Between 10V and 15V d.c. at

6 watts is required

SMA panel

socket

Connect the supplied antenna

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.4 System Connector Pin Assignments

Refer to the table below when monitoring signals on, or connecting to,

J10, J11 or J12. The table shows the system-connector pin assignments

for the GM47 module.

VCC

DGND

ON/OFF

SIMPRESENCE

SIMDAT

DAC

VCC

J10, J11 & J12 pin

numbering

viewed from the

front of the

VCC

developer’s box

Reserved for future use

SIMVCC

SIMRST

SIMCLK

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO4

VRTC

ADC1

ADC2

ADC3

SDA

SCL

BUZZER

LED

OUT5

VIO

TX_ON

DTR

DCD

RTS

CTS

TD (DTMS)

TD3 (TX3)

TD2 (CTMS)

PCMULD

PCMOUT

PCMSYNC

MICP

RD (DFMS)

RD3 (RX3)

RD2 (CFMS)

PCMDLD

PCMIN

PCMCLK

MICN

BEARP

BEARN

SERVICE

AGND

AFMS

ATMS

Figure 2.4 System connector pin assignments

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part 3: Integrating the

Module

Product Photo/Illustration

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Mechanical Description

1.1 Interface Description

The pictures below show the mechanical design of the GM47 along

with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes. The

GM47 is protected with AISI 304 stainless steel covers that meet the

environmental and EMC requirements.

Mounting hole/ground connection

System connector

Antenna connector

Figure 1.1 GM47 viewed from below

Figure 1.2 GM47, viewed from above

Please note the following:

• Mounting holes positioned at the corners make it possible to

securely bolt the module into your application.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

• Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of the

module.

• The SIM card is mounted in your application, external to the

module.

• The System Connector is a 60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch

type. The pins and their electrical characteristics are described in

“2. System Connector Interface”, page 41.

• Information about the Antenna Connector is found in

“3. Antenna Connector”, page 68.

1.2 Physical Dimensions

2.20 (4x)

2.86

4.78

3.80

2.05

7.15 2.90

4.60

3.00

2.80

50.00

33.00

30.20

2.30

9.00

46.40

1.80

Figure 1.3 Dimensions of the GM47

Measurements are given in millimetres. See also “Technical Data”,

page 75.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. System Connector Interface

2.1 Overview

Electrical connections to the module (except the antenna), are made

through the System Connector Interface. The system connector is a

60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch device.

The system connector allows both board-to-board and board-to-cable

connections to be made. Use a board-board connector to connect the

module directly to a PCB, and a board-cable connector to connect the

module via a cable.

Figure 2.1 below shows the numbering of the connector pins.

A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF

connector on the module as shown below. Connect this ground point to

the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance path

possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD picked up

by the antenna to bypass the module’s internal ground path.

Ground

connection

Pin 59

Pin 1

Pin 60

Pin 2

Figure 2.1 GM47, viewed from underneath

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

The following table gives the pin assignments for the system connector

interface and a short description for each signal.

Note!

Under the heading “Dir” in the table, module input and output signals

are indicated by the letters I and O respectively.

Signal Name

Dir

Signal Type

Description

VCC

Supply

Power supply

Digital ground

Power supply

Digital ground

Power supply

Digital ground

Power supply

Digital ground

Power supply

Digital ground

Power supply

Digital ground

DGND

VCC

Supply

DGND

VCC

Supply

DGND

VCC

Supply

DGND

VCC

Supply

DGND

VCC

Supply

DGND

Reserved for

future use

ON/OFF

Internal pull

Turns the module on and off.

up, open drain Former WAKE_B

SIMVCC

Digital 3V/5V

SIM card power supply. Power output

from module for SIM Card

SIMPRESENCE

Internal pull

SIM Presence

up, open drain A “1” indicates that the SIM is missing; a

“0” that it is inserted

SIMRST

SIMDATA

SIMCLK

DAC

Digital 3V/5V

Analogue

SIM card reset

I/O

SIM card data

SIM card clock

Digital to analogue converter

General purpose input/output 1

General purpose input/output 2

General purpose input/output 3

General purpose input/output 4

Supply for real time clock

Analogue to digital converter 1

Analogue to digital converter 2

IO1

I/O

Digital 2.75

Supply 1.8V

Analogue

IO2

IO3

IO4

VRTC

ADC1

ADC2

Analogue

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

Signal Name

Dir

Signal Type

Description

ADC3

SDA

Analogue

Analogue to digital converter 3

I/O

2.75, internal

pull up

I C data

SCL

2.75, internal

pull up

I C clock

BUZZER

OUT5

LED

Digital 2.75

Buzzer output from module

Programmable output 5

Flashing LED

VIO

Power Out

2.75V

Module power indication. VIO is a

2.75V at 75mA output supply that can

be used to power external circuitry that

interfaces to the GM47

TX_ON

Digital 2.75

This output indicates when the GSM

module is going to transmit the burst

Digital 2.75

Ring Indicator (UART1)

DTR

DCD

RTS

CTS

Data Terminal Ready (UART1)

Data Carrier Detect (UART1)

Request To Send (UART1)

Clear To Send (UART1)

Transmitted Data (UART1).

Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).

Former DTMS

Digital 2.75

Received Data (UART1).

Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).

Formerly DFMS

TD3

RD3

TD2

Digital 2.75

UART3 transmission

UART3 reception

UART2 transmission. Used for flashing

the memory. Former CTMS

RD2

Digital 2.75

UART2 Reception. Used for flashing the

memory. Former CFMS

PCMULD

PCMDLD

PCMOUT

PCMIN

Digital 2.75

Analogue

DSP PCM digital audio input

DSP PCM digital audio output

Codec PCM digital audio output

Codec PCM digital audio input

DSP PCM frame sync

PCMSYNC

PCMCLK

MICP

DSP PCM clock output

Microphone Input positive

Microphone Input negative

Speaker output positive

MICN

BEARP

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Signal Name

Dir

Signal Type

Description

BEARN

AFMS

Analogue

2.7V

Speaker output negative

Audio output from module

SERVICE

Flash programming voltage for the MS.

Enable logger information if not

flashing. Formerly VPPFLASH

ATMS

Analogue

Audio input to module

Analogue ground

AGND

2.2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics

Many of the signals, as indicated in the table above, are high-speed

CMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from a 2.75V±5% internal

voltage regulator, and are defined as Digital 2.75V. Whenever a signal

is defined as Digital 2.75V, the following electrical characteristics

apply.

Parameter

High Level Output Voltage (V ), I = –2mA

Min.

2.2

Max.

2.75

0.6

Units

Low Level Output Voltage (V ), I = 2mA

High Level Input Voltage (V )

1.93

2.75

0.8

Low Level Input voltage (V )

Note!

Unused pins can be left floating.

2.2.1 General Protection Requirements

• All 2.75V digital inputs will continuously withstand and suffer no

damage in the power-on or power-off condition when subjected to

any voltage from -0.5V to 3.47V (3.3V+5%).

• All 2.75V digital outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit

to any other voltage within the range 0V to 3V.

• All analogue outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit to

any voltage within the range 0V to 3V.

• The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply will continuously

withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0V to 5.8V.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.3 Grounds

Signal

Description

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

DGND

AGND

Digital ground

Analogue ground

There are two ground connections in the GM47, AGND (analogue

ground) and DGND (digital ground). Pin assignments are shown in the

table above.

Note!

AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. They

must not be joined together in your application.

2.3.1 Analogue Ground - AGND

AGND is the return signal, or analogue audio reference, for ATMS

(Audio To Mobile Station) and AFMS (Audio From Mobile Station).

Parameter

Limit

≅12.5mA

max

2.3.2 Digital Ground - DGND

DGND is the reference or return signal for all system interface digital

signals and is also the d.c. return for SERVICE and the power supply,

VCC. Connect all DGND pins together in your application in order to

carry the current drawn by the module.

2.4 VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input

Pins

1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11

Signal

VCC

Description

regulated power supply input

Power is supplied to the module VCC pins, from an external source.

Connect all VCC pins together in your application in order to carry the

current drawn by the module.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

The electrical characteristics for VCC are shown in the table below.

Parameter

Mode

Limit

Nominal

3.6V

Tolerance

including ripple

3.4V - 4.0V

Vcc supply voltage

Over-voltage limit

Maximum ripple

Burst transmission

5.5V

TBD

Maximum allowable voltage

drop

200mV

<350mA (average)

<2A (peak)

Current drawn, at full TX

power

a. Measured at system connector pins.

Note!

GM47 has no internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks

during GSM burst transmission. We recommend you follow these

general guidelines:

• Fit a low ESR electrolytic capacitor close to the module:

> 1,000µF;

<100mΩ ESR.

• Make sure power supply to module line resistance is <200mΩ.

2.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signal

Signal

Dir

Description

ON/OFF

VIO

Pulse signal to turn the module on or off

2.75V supplied by the module

2.5.1 Switching the module ON and OFF

The module is turned on and off by momentarily grounding the

ON/OFF pin. This input should be driven by an open collector, or other

device which will not tie the input high, to allow the internal alarm clock

function to operate. See the table below for exact characteristics. In the

OFF state the current consumption of the module is less than 100µA.

The ON/OFF signal is a digital input with the following characteristics:

Parameter

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Units

Voltage HIGH level (FALSE)

Voltage LOW level (TRUE)

Pull-up resistance (internal)

VCC

0.3 x VCC

kΩ

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

The following timing diagram illustrates both power-up and power-

down processes.

Module on

Module off

t₁

t₂

ON/OFF

VIO

t_pwr

Module

powered

Module power-up

Module power-down

Figure 2.2 ON/OFF timing and VIO performance

Times are defined as follows:

Time

Description

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Units

Turn-on pulse time

Turn-off pulse time

Hardware-reset pulse time

≥2

≥1

t₂

>10

t_pwr

Time for VIO and internal voltages

to be established

100

200

a. Active only when a full system reset is required.

2.5.2 VIO - 2.75V Supply

VIO provides an output voltage derived from an internal 2.75V

regulator. Its electrical characteristics are shown below.

Parameter

Min.

Typ.

Max.

2.85

Units

Output Voltage (I

Load current

= 50mA) 2.70

2.75

load

You can use this output for the following:

• to indicate that the module is alive;

• to power interface circuits, external to the module.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.6 Analogue Audio

Signal

Dir

Description

AFMS

ATMS

AGND

Audio from mobile station

Audio to mobile station

Ground (return) for analogue audio

ATMS is the audio input, and AFMS is the audio output, of the module.

These signals can be used in Hands-free or Portable Hands-free mode.

Hands-free Mode

This mode is used for audio accessories, such as car kits and hands-free

equipment.

Portable Hands-free Mode

This is the default mode. It activates a different amplification factor in

the ME, and activates a 2V microphone bias level for ATMS. The bias

level is adjustable using AT*E2EAMS.

2.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station - ATMS

ATMS is the analogue audio input to the module. Internally, the signal

is sent to the CODEC (COder/DECoder), where it is converted to digital

audio in PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) format. The encoded audio is

sent to PCMOUT via the internal PCM bus.

ATMS provides a DC bias when it is used as the microphone input in

Portable Hands-free applications. All other sources must be

a.c.-coupled to avoid attenuation of low frequencies, and to prevent

incorrect biasing or damage to the ATMS input. Use a capacitor greater

than the value shown in the table below.

The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part of

the CODEC.

Parameter

Limit

Application driving impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz)

≤300Ω

≥1µF

AC coupling capacitance

Module input impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz)

Low frequency cut-off (-3dB)

>50kΩ

300Hz ± 50Hz

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

Parameter

Limit

High frequency cut-off (–3dB)

Hands-free mode

Portable hands-free mode

Additional Gain in Portable hands-free mode

> 3500Hz ± 50Hz

Output d.c. bias level

2.0V ± 0.1V

28.5dB

a. The a.c.-coupling capacitance must be supplied by your application, unless

a d.c.-coupled microphone is used.

The following tables show the nominal PGA (programming gain

settings). For more information see the relevant AT commands.

Maximum input voltage limit: 245mV

rms

Input

Input (mV

)

TXAGC (dB)

AUX AMP

PCMOUT (dBm0)

rms

gain

ATMS

245

Maximum input level at MICI, 61.4mV output at

rms

PCMOUT = 3dBm0

Input

Differential

TXAGC (dB)

AUX AMP

gain

PCMOUT (dBm0)

input (mV

)

rms

MICN

MICP

61.4

Output at AFMS for 3dBm0 at PCMIN

Input

dBm0

RXPGA

Volume

AFMS (mV

)

rms

control (dB)

PCMIN

436

Output at BEARN/BEARP for 3dBm0 at PCMIN

Input

dBm0

RXPGA

Volume

BEAR (mV

)

rms

control (dB)

PCMIN

388

2.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station - AFMS

AFMS is the analogue audio output from the module and may be used

to drive a speaker or the ear-piece in a portable hands-free accessory.

PCM digital audio signals, entering the module through the PCMIN pin,

are translated to analogue signals by the CODEC. See “2.7 PCM Digital

Audio”, page 52 for further information.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

The table below shows the audio signal levels for AFMS.

Parameter

Limit

Speaker impedance

Output Capacitance

64Ω to 1kΩ

2.2µF ±10%

Drive capability into 5kΩ

>2.4V

>2.2V

>1.3V

p-p

(0.3 - 3.5kHz)

Drive capability into 1.5kΩ

(0.3 - 3.5kHz)

Levels (THD <5%)

Drive capability into 150Ω

(at 1kHz)

2.6.3 Microphone Signals

Speaker signals

Dir

Function

MICP

MICN

Microphone positive input

Microphone negative input

MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input pins.

These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone. The

microphone contains an FET buffer with an open drain output, which is

supplied with at least +2V relative to ground by the module as shown

below.

MICP

2 - 2.5V

@ 1mA

68nF

CODEC

MICN

GM47

AGND

Figure 2.3 Microphone connections to the module

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.6.4 Speaker Signals

Speaker signals

Dir

Function

BEARP

BEARN

Speaker positive output

Speaker negative output

BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output pins. These are

differential-mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in the

table below.

Parameter

Limit

Output level (differential)

Output level (dynamic load = 32Ω)

≥4.0V_pp

≥2.8V_pp

–9dB ± 1

Gain PCMIN to BEARP/BEARN (differential)

Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level

Offset, BEARP to BEARN

≤5%

±30mV

≥40dB

Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation

a. See PCMIN signal in “2.7 PCM Digital Audio”, page 52

The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be

connected to BEARP and BEARN.

Ear piece model

Impedance

Tolerance

Dynamic ear piece

Piezo ear piece

[32Ω + 800µH] // 100pF

[150Ω + 800µH] // 100pF

1kΩ + 60nF

±20%

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.7 PCM Digital Audio

Signal

Dir

Function

PCMCLK

PCMSYNC

PCMULD

PCMDLD

PCMIN

PCM clock

PCM frame sync

PCM audio input to DSP

PCM audio output from DSP

PCM audio input to Codec

PCM audio output to Codec

PCMOUT

Figure 2.4 shows the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio

connection for external devices. These connections can be used to

process PCM digital audio signals, bypassing the module’s internal

analogue audio CODEC.

GM47

PCMSYNC & PCMCLK

PCMDLD

PCMULD

PCMIN

DSP

CODEC

PCMOUT

System connector

Analogue

audio

signals

Link for internal

digital-audio processing

Figure 2.4 Pin connections to digital audio

Note!

When no external audio processing is performed, the following pins

must be connected together:

• PCMDLD to PCMIN

• PCMULD to PCMOUT

Electrical characteristics

Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.7.1 PCM Data Format

All of the module’s PCM signals, including signals between its CODEC

and DSP conform to the PCM data I/O format of the industry standard

DSP from Texas Instruments.

PCMCLK (bit clock) and PCMSYNC (frame syncronisation) are both

generated by the DSP within the module.

The DSP within the module is the master therefore all external PCM

clocks and data from external devices must be synchronized to it

13-Bit PCM Mode

Bit

Contents

D15 to D14

D13 to D1

Equal to D13

Two's complement of the 13-bit PCM

LSB, not used

The module implements 13-bit PCM with the 13-bit data embedded in

a 16-bit word within a 24-bit frame (see Figure 2.6). Each PCM word

contains 16-bits: D0 to D15. D13 to D1 is the two’s complement value

of the 13-bit PCM, with D13 as the sign bit. D14 and D15 are always

set to be equivalent with D13. D0, the LSB, is not used as shown in

Figure 2.5 below.

= D13

13 bit PCM

MSB D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 LSB

16 bit data word

Figure 2.5 16-bit data word format

16-Bit PCM Mode

Bit

D15 - D0

Contents

Two's complement

The frame format is equal to the one shown in Figure 2.5, but with D15,

D14 and D0 filled with significant bits. D0 is the two’s compliment

value of the 16-bit PCM with bit 15 as the sign bit.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

PCM Timing Diagrams

The PCM timing is shown in Figure 2.6 below and it is seen that the

CPU has 45µs to serve an interrupt and setup data channels. Data is sent

on the falling edge of the sync pulse. The data bits in PCMULD and

PCMDLD are aligned so that the MSB in each word occurs on the same

clock edge as shown in Figure 2.7.

125 µs

Clk

Sync

Data

45 µs

Figure 2.6 16-bit word within 24-bit frame

PCM signal timing is shown in Figure 2.7. The signals characteristics

are described in the tables following Figure 2.7.

PCMCLK

t_PSS

PCMSYN

PCMIN

t_PSH

t_DSH

t_DSL

MSB

D14

D13

t_PDLP

D14

PCMOUT

MSB

D13

Figure 2.7 PCM Timing Diagram

Name

Description

Typ.

2.5

Unit

µs

PCMSYN (setup) to PCMCLK (fall)

PCMSYN pulse length

PSS

µs

PSH

DSL

PCMI (setup) to PCMCLK (fall)

PCMI (hold) from PCMCLK (fall)

PCMO valid from PCMCLK (rise)

2.5

µs

DSH

PDLP

µs

Name

Description

Typ.

200

Unit

kHz

µs

PCM clock frequency

PCMCLK

PCM clock period with 50/50 mark space ratio

PCM sync frequency

PCMCLK

kHz

PCMSYN

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

Typical Rise/Fall times

Rise Time

Fall Time

Unit

PCMCLK

PCMSYN

PCMOUT

PCMDLD

900

2.8 Serial Data Interfaces

Signal

Dir

Description

RS232

CCITT Nº

Serial data to module (UART1)

Serial data from module (UART1)

Request To Send (UART1)

Clear To Send (UART1)

103

104

105

106

108.2

109

125

RTS

CTS

DTR

DCD

Data Terminal Ready (UART1)

Data Carrier Detect (UART1)

Ring Indicator (UART1)

TD2

RD2

TD3

RD3

UART2 Data Transmission

UART2 Data Reception

UART3 Data Transmission

UART3 Data Reception

The serial channels, consisting of three UARTs, are asynchronous

communication links to the application or accessory units. UART1 has

RS-232 functionality. UART2 and UART3 behave as general-purpose

serial data links. In addition they are used for accessories and GPS

respectively.

Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply.

The standard character format consists of 1 start bit, 8 bit data, no parity

and 1 stop bit. In all, there are 10 bits per character.

2.8.1 UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI

UART1 signals conform to a 9-pin RS232 (V.24) serial port, except for

the DSR (CCITT N 107) signal. The DSR signal has been removed as

it is usually connected to DTR in most systems.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Note!

UART1 signal levels do not match standard RS232 (V.28) levels. The

relationship between the levels is shown in the table below.

RS232 level

RD, TD

RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI

CMOS level

<– 3V

>+3V

OFF

>1.93V

<0.80V

Conversion between the module CMOS levels and RS232 levels can be

achieved using a standard interface IC, such as the Maxim Integrated

Products MAX3237.

2.8.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD

The default baud rate is 9.6kbits/s, however higher bit rates of up to

460 kbits/s are supported, set by an AT command. UART1 starts at a

rate of 9.6kbits/s in standard AT command mode. The module also

supports GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol and starts when the

appropriate command is sent.

Serial Data From Module (RD)

RD is an output signal that the module uses to send data via UART1 to

the application.

Parameter

Limit

Application load resistance

≥100kΩ

Application load capacitance

<100pF

Serial Data To Module (TD)

TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data via UART1

to the module.

Parameter

Limit

Application driving impedance

Input capacitance

<100Ω

<100pF

Input resistance

<100Ω in series, with 100kΩ to DGND

2.8.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI

UART1 control signals are active low and need a standard interface IC,

such as the MAX3237, to generate standard RS232 levels.

UART1 converted signals, together with DGND, RD and TD form a

9-pin RS232 data port.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10th of the data

transmission speed for data rates up to 460kbit/s (byte-oriented flow

control mechanism).

Note!

When hardware flow control is not used in communications between

the application and the module, RTS and CTS must to be connected to

each other at the module.

Switching times for RTS and CTS

The table below shows the switching times.

Parameter

Limit

Time from Low to High level

Time from High to Low level

<2µs

Request to Send (RTS)

Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level is

high by internal pull up.

The application must pull RTS low to enable data transmission from the

module. Similarly, the module asserts CTS low, indicating it is ready to

receive data transmission from the host.

Parameter

Limit

Application driving impedance

Input capacitance

<100Ω

<2nF

Input resistance (pull-up)

100kΩ to VCC

Clear To Send (CTS)

CTS is asserted by the DCE to indicate that the host (DTE) may transmit

data. When CTS is high, the host (DTE) is not permitted to transmit

data.

The table below shows the load characteristics for this signal.

Parameter

Limit

Application load capacitance

Application load resistance

<500pF

≥1MΩ

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Data Terminal Ready (DTR)

DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to receive data. It also acts as a

hardware ‘hang-up’, terminating calls when switched high. The signal

is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTR with an AT

command.

Data Carrier Detect (DCD)

DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal)

when low.

Ring Indicator (RI)

RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when

low. You can define the exact behaviour of RI with an AT command.

Data Set Ready (DSR)

No DSR signal is provided. Use any DGND connection for this

functionality.

2.8.4 UART2 - TD2, RD2

UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication port with

transmission and reception lines.

This communication port works in a mode called Operation and

Maintenance.

Operation and Maintenance mode works in combination with the

SERVICE signal. Two events are possible if the SERVICE signal is

active when the module is turned on. These are:

• the module is reprogrammed if UART2 is connected to a computer

running Sony Ericsson update software;

• the module enters logging mode and sends data to UART2 if no

reprogramming information is received.

Timing and electrical signals characteristics are the same as for

UART1, TD and RD.

Transmitted Data 2 (TD2)

TD2 is used by the application to send data to the module via UART2.

It has the same electrical characteristics as TD.

Received Data 2 (RD2)

RD2 is used to send data to the application via UART2. It has the same

electrical characteristics as RD.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.8.5 UART3 - TD3, RD3 (designated for future use)

UART3 is a full duplex serial communication port with transmission

and reception lines. It has the same timing and electrical signal

characteristics as UART1, TD and RD.

Transmitted Data 3 (TD3)

TD3 is used by your application to send data to the module via UART3.

Received Data 3 (RD3)

RD is used to send data to your application via UART3.

2.9 SIM Card Related Signals

Signal

SIMVCC

Dir

Description

SIM card power supply

SIM card presence

SIM card reset

SIMPRESENCE

SIMRST

SIMCLK

SIM card clock

SIMDATA

I/O SIM card data

These connections allow you to communicate with the SIM card holder

in you application.

Note!

The distance between the SIM card holder and the module can be up to

25cm.

This SIM interface allows the use of 3V and 5V SIM cards. By default

it works on 3V levels but will automatically switch to 5V, if a 5V SIM

card is fitted.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

SIM voltage levels, as shown in the following table, are dependent on

the type of SIM card detected by the module.

Signal

Parameter

Mode

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Unit

2.7

4.5

2.1

3.5

3.0

5.0

3.3

5.5

3.0

5.0

0.9

1.5

3.0

5.0

0.2

3.0

5.0

0.35

0.3

SIMVCC

SIM supply voltage

High Level Input

voltage (V_IH)

SIMDAT

Low Level Input

voltage (V_IL)

2.7

4.7

High Level Output

voltage (V_OH

)

Low Level Output

voltage (V_OL

)

2.4

4.4

High Level Output

voltage (V_OH

SIMCLK

SIMRST

)

Low Level Output

voltage (V_OL

SIMCLK

SIMRST

)

2.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCE

SIMPRESENCE is used to determine whether a SIM card has been

inserted into or removed from the SIM card holder. You should

normally wire it to the “card inserted switch” of the SIM card holder,

but different implementations are possible.

When left open, an internal pull-up resistor maintains the signal high

and means “SIM card missing” to the module. When pulled low the

module assumes a SIM card is inserted.

SIMPRESENCE is a Digital 2.75 CMOS input with the following

electrical characteristics.

Parameter

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Units

Pull-up resistance (at 2.75 V)

100

kΩ

Low Level Input voltage (SIM inserted)

High Level Input voltage (SIM missing)

0.80

2.75

>1.93

Note!

To meet regulatory approvals SIMPRESENCE must be implemented.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.10 Service/Programming

Signal

Dir

Description

SERVICE

Flash programming voltage

When the SERVICE input signal is active the module will:

• be reprogrammed if data is received through UART2 from a

computer running Sony Ericsson reprogramming software;

• or it will output logging data on UART2.

The electrical characteristics are given below. The signal reference is

DGND.

SERVICE Voltage (V)

Mode

Drive Capacity

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Normal Operation

0.8

Service/enable

programming

1.9

2.75

13.6

>1mA

2.11 Buzzer

Signal

Dir

Description

BUZZER

Buzzer output from module

Connecting the BUZZER signal to an inverting transistor-buffer

followed by a piezoelectric transducer enables the module to play pre-

programmed melodies or sounds.

2.12 LED

Signal

Dir

Description

LED

LED Output from module

The LED states shown below, are hard coded.

LED indication

Operational status

No indication

Green, steady

Green, blinking

No power or in the OFF state

Power on, not connected to a network

Power on, connected to a network

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

The following circuit should be used to connect an LED.

220

VIO

GM47

2k2

LED

BC817

10k

DGND

Figure 2.8 Electrical connections for the LED

2.13 General Purpose Digital I/O Ports

I/O port

signal

Default

signal

Description

IO1

Programmable Input/Output 1

Programmable Input/Output 2

Programmable Input/Output 3

Programmable Input/Output 4

Programmable input 5/Data Terminal Ready

Programmable output 5

IO2

IO3

IO4

IN5

DTR

OUT5

OUT6

Programmable Output 6/Data Carrier

Detect

OUT7

DCD

Programmable Output 7/Ring indicator

Signals which have an entry in the Default Signal column in the above

table are multiplexed. Their operation depends on AT commands.

The following table gives you the input impedance. These values only

apply when the signals are configured as input signals.

Parameter

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Units

Input impedance (IO1 - IO4) (pull-up)

Input impedance (IN5)

100

kΩ

100

kΩ

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O Ports

Signal

Dir

Description

DAC

Digital to analogue conversion output

Analogue to digital conversion input 1

Analogue to digital conversion input 2

Analogue to digital conversion input 3

ADC1

ADC2

ADC3

The module is able to convert digital to analogue signals and vice versa.

2.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DAC

The DAC is an 8-bit converter. Conversion takes place when an AT

command is sent to the module. The module sends the resulting

analogue value to the DAC pin.

DAC output electrical characteristics are given in the following table.

Parameter

Limit

Units

Resolution

Bits

Output voltage for code = 0

(2.75 x 0.05) ± 0.05

Output voltage for code = 255

Nominal step size

(2.75 x 0.95) ± 0.05

(2.75 x 0.9)/256

≤ ± 0.5

Absolute error

Output wide-band noise and clock

feed-through 0-1.1MHz

≤0.5

rms

Power-supply rejection ratio 50Hz - 10kHz

≥40

≤2 (Load A)

Conversion rate ± 0.5LSB

≤50 (Load B)

Output buffer impedance when disabled

Output current source or sink

≥50

≥1

kΩ

Current consumption (active)

≤1.0

a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is ±5%

b. Referred to the ideal conversion characteristic.

c. See Figure 2.9, page 64

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

DAC

100 - 200pF

100k

Load A

DGND

DAC

10nF

1nF

Load B

DGND

Figure 2.9 DAC loads

2.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCx

The ADC is an 8-bit converter. An analogue value applied to any of the

ADC pins is converted and stored in a register inside the module. When

the appropriate AT command is received by the module, the digital

value stored in the register is read.

ADC electrical characteristics are shown in the table below.

Parameter

Min.

Max.

Units

Resolution

Bits

Input voltage for 0000 0000 word

0.01 x 2.75

Input voltage for 1111 1111 word

0.99 x 2.75

2.75

Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)

Overall Non-Linearity (INL)

Absolute accuracy

±0.75

±0.60

±1.5

LSB

MΩ

Input impedance

Average supply current

(continuous conversion)

External source impedance

kΩ

a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is ±5%

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

2.15 External I ²C Serial Control Bus

Note!

The I C bus is currently not supported by the software

Signal

SDA

Dir

I/O

Description

I C serial data

SCL

I C serial clock

The external I C bus consists of two signals, SDA and SCL. This bus

is isolated from the module’s internal I C bus to ensure proper

operation of the module, even if the external I C bus is damaged.

The electrical characteristics are shown below.

Parameter

Min.

81.25

1.2

Typ.

Max.

Units

kHz

µs

400

Frequency I C CLK

High or low I C CLK

308

308-

1230

Delay time after falling edge of I C

CLK

Hold time after falling edge of I C

CLK

400

kHz

µs

Frequency I C CLK

1.2

High or low I C CLK

100

Delay time after falling edge of I C

CLK

Hold time after falling edge of I C

CLK

2.16 TX_ON - Burst Transmission

Signal

Dir

Description

GSM module to transmit

TX_ON

Burst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit is

transmitting RF signals. TX_ON indicates the module is going into

transmission mode.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.17 Real Time Clock

Signal

Dir

Description

VRTC

Voltage for the Real Time Clock

The Real Time Clock (RTC) provides the main microprocessor with a

time-of-day calendar and alarm, and a one-hundred-year calendar. It’s

accuracy is shown in the table below

Parameter

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Units

RTC accuracy

20 (52)

40 (104)

ppm (s/month)

The Real Time Clock operates in two modes when connected to a

separate power supply:

• RTC normal mode: the module is in ON or OFF mode and it is

supplied with power (VCC is applied).

• RTC back-up mode: VCC is disconnected and the RTC is

maintained by a separate backup power supply connected to the

VRTC input (see Figure 2.10 below).

Backup power is provided by a capacitor, golden-capacitor or battery in

your application and must be connected to the VRTC pin. During RTC

normal operation, the back up source will be charged.

In back-up mode, the back-up source must provide enough power for

RTC operation. Refer to the table for the amount of current required.

The following table shows voltage characteristics for both modes.

Parameter

Min.

Typ.

Max.

Units

Supply Voltage RTC (normal mode -

charging the capacitor)

1.6

1.8

2.0

Supply Voltage RTC (back-up mode -

Capacitor provides the current)

1.0

1.8

5.0

2.0

Current drawn

10.0

µA

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE

If the voltage drops below 1.0 V in back-up mode, the RTC will stop

working. The following diagram shows the RTC connections.

VRTC

Backup

supply

GM47

DGND

Figure 2.10 RTC connections

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3. Antenna Connector

The module’s antenna connector allows transmission of the radio

frequency (RF) signals from the module to an external customer-

supplied antenna. The connector is a micro-miniature coaxial MMCX

surface mounted component. A number of suitable MMCX type,

mating plugs are available from the following manufacturers;

• Amphenol;

• Suhner;

• IMS Connector Systems.

The electrical characteristics of the antenna interface are shown below.

Parameter

Limit

Description

Nominal impedance

50Ω

2 Watt peak (Class 4)

1 Watt peak (Class 1)

Better than –102dBm

Extended GSM900

GSM1800

Output Power

Extended GSM900

GSM1800

Static Sensitivity

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE

4. Hints for Integrating the Module

This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate the

GM47 into your application from a hardware perspective.

Please read and consider the information under the following headings

before starting your integration work:

• Safety advice and precautions.

• Installation of the module.

• Antenna.

4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions

4.1.1 General

• Always ensure that use of the module is permitted. The module may

present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronic

devices. As a rule, the module must not be used in hospitals, airports

or planes.

• You are responsible for observing your country’s safety standards,

and where applicable the relevant wiring rules.

• Never use the module at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting area

or in any other environment where explosives may be present.

• Operating the module close to other electronic devices, such as

antennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagnetic

interference.

• Never try to dismantle the module yourself. There are no

components inside the module that can be serviced by the user. If

you attempt to dismantle the module, you may invalidate the

warranty.

• To protect the power supply cables and meet the fire safety

requirements, it is recommended that the electrical circuits are

supplied with a power regulator. The power regulator should be

placed as close to the terminals of the power supply as possible.

• Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the

GM47. Note, Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects, non-

conformities or deviations caused thereby.

4.1.2 SIM Card

• Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that you

are not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions to

avoid electrostatic discharges. The module must be switched off

before the SIM card is installed in your application.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

• When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lie

exposed under the SIM card holder. CAUTION: Do not touch these

connectors! If you do, you may release an electrical discharge that

could damage the module or the SIM card.

• When designing your application, the SIM card’s accessibility

should be taken into account. We always recommend that you have

the SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that the SIM

card cannot be used by an unauthorized person.

4.1.3 Antenna

• If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk of

lightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antenna

manufacturer.

• Never connect more than one module to a single antenna. The

module can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the

transmitter of another module.

• Like any mobile station, the antenna of the module emits radio

frequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference), you

must determine whether the application itself, or equipment in the

application’s proximity, needs further protection against radio

emission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is secured

either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving the

antenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable.

• The module and antenna may be damaged if either come into contact

with ground potentials other than the one in your application.

Beware, ground potential are not always what they appear to be.

• In the final application, the antenna must be positioned more than

20cm away from human bodies. When this rule cannot be applied,

the application designer is responsible for providing the SAR

measurement test report and declaration.

4.2 Installation of the Module

4.2.1 Where to Install the Module

There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration

when designing your application as they might affect the module and its

function. They are:

Environmental Conditions

The module must be installed so that the environmental conditions

stated in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity and

vibration are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in the

Technical Data section must not be exceeded.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE

Signal Strength

The module has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal

strength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved to

another position. Signal strength may depend on how close the module

is to a radio base station. You must ensure that the location at which you

intend to use the module, is within the network coverage area.

Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from

another source, for example an electronic device in the immediate

vicinity. More information about possible communication disturbances

can be found in section 4.3.5, page 74.

When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength by

issuing the AT command AT+CSQ. See “AT+CSQ Signal Strength”,

page 126.

Tip!

Before installing the module, use an ordinary mobile telephone to check

a possible location for it. In determining the location for the module and

antenna, you should consider signal strength as well as cable length

Connection of Components to GM47

The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectly

designed or installed, external components may cause radiation limits to

be exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperly

installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in

the module or equipment.

Network and Subscription

• Before your application is used, you must ensure that your chosen

network provides the necessary telecommunication services.

Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information.

• If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is included in

your (voice) subscription.

• Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in

section “2.3.2 Short Message Service”, page 18.

4.2.2 How to Install the Module

Power Supply

• Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. This

ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the allowed

range, even during the maximum peak current. An electrolytic

capacitor should be placed close to the power supply pins of the

module to supply the peak currents during burst transmission. See

“VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input”, page 45.

• See section “2.2.1 General Protection Requirements”, page 44.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Grounds

A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF

connector on the module (see Figure 2.1, page 41). Connect this ground

point to the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance

path possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD

picked up by the antenna to bypass the module’s internal ground path.

Note!

It is recommended that you use a cable with a maximum resistance of

5mΩ for the ground connection.

AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. They

must not be joined together in your application.

Audio

Use a coupling capacitor in ATMS line if the application does not use

the module’s bias voltage. See also “Figure 2.3 Microphone

connections to the module”, page 50.

Software Upgrade

To upgrade the software, the system connector must be accessible in

your application. The pins SERVICE, TD, RD and the power signals

are used for this purpose. Please contact customer support for more

details.

4.3 Antenna

4.3.1 General

The antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radio

link between the network and the module. Since the antenna transmits

and receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will depend

on:

• the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);

• the placement of the antenna;

• communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna

operates.

In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antenna

placement, antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances are

addressed.

In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for

additional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors,

antenna placement, and the surrounding area. You should also

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE

determine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your local

antenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitable

for your the application.

4.3.2 Antenna Type

Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the module.

Consider the following requirements:

• the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use:

EGSM/GSM900/1800 for the GM47 and

GSM850/1900 for the GM48;

• the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50Ω;

• the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 2W;

• the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to the

module.

4.3.3 Antenna Placement

The antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or other

antennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacent

antennas, operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50cm.

If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at the

closest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signal

received by the module.

The module’s peak output power can reach 2W. RF field strength varies

with antenna type and distance. At 10cm from the antenna the field

strength may be up to 70V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V/m.

In general, CE-marked products for residential and commercial areas,

and light industry can withstand a minimum of 3V/m.

4.3.4 The Antenna Cable

Use 50Ω impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50Ω impedance

connectors (frequency range up to 2GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensure

that the antenna cable is as short as possible.

The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on the

effectiveness of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if you

use an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, it

is crucial that the antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable.

Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Each

additional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

4.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances

Possible communication disturbances include the following:

• Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.

• Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily

decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.

• Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signals

caused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can be a

particular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are thick

and reinforced.

• Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal

strength. This is the result of interference caused when direct and

reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such as

buildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.

• Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSM

network. Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell to

the next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with communication and

may cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. TECHNICAL DATA

5. Technical Data

Mechanical Specifications

Maximum length

Maximum width

Maximum thickness

50mm

33mm

7.15mm

(excluding connector pins and

top of antenna connector)

Weight

18.5g

Power supply voltage, normal operation

Voltage

Ripple

3.6V nominal (3.4V - 4.0V)

<100mV @ 200kHz; <20mV @ >200kHz

Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range, ripple included

Voice/CSD: <250mA (<2A peak)

Data (GPRS 4+1); <350mA (<2A peak)

Power consumption

Idle mode: <5mA

Switched off: <100µA

Radio specifications

Frequency range

GM47: EGSM 900MHz and 1800MHz (dual band)

GM48: GSM 850MHz and 1900MHz (dual band)

GM47: 900MHz, Class 4, 2W; 1800MHz Class 1, 1W

GM48: 850MHz, Class 5, 0.8W; 1900MHz Class 1, 1W

Maximum RF output

power

Antenna impedance 50Ω

SIM card

3 V or 5 V

Support of external SIM card

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Environmental specifications

Operating temperature

range (full specification)

-25°C to +55°C

-30°C to +85°C

-40°C to +85°C

95% at +40°C

Operating temperature

range (working)

Storage temperature

range

Maximum relative

humidity

Stationary vibration,

sinusoidal

Displacement: 7.5mm

Acceleration amplitude: 20m/s² and 40m/s²

Frequency range: 2-8Hz, 8-200Hz, 200-500Hz

Stationary vibration,

random

Acceleration spectral density (m²/s²):

0.96, 2.88, 0.96

Frequency range:

5-10Hz, 10-200Hz, 200-500Hz, 60min/axis

Non-stationary vibration,

including shock

Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:

3 shocks in each axis and direction;

300m/s², 11ms

Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:

3 shocks in each axis and direction;

1000m/s², 6ms

Bump

Acceleration: 250m/s²

1.2m

Free fall transportation

Rolling pitching

transportation

Angle: ±35degrees; period: 8s

Static load

10kPa

Low air pressure/high air

pressure

70kPa/106kPa

Data Storage

SMS storage capacity

40 in ME

In addition, the unit can handle as many

SMS as the SIM can store

Phone book capacity

100

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

6. Declaration of Conformity

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

7. FCC Certificate

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part 4: Using AT Commands

Product Photo/Illustration

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Introduction to AT Commands

1.1 Overview

AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to

control and implement the functions of the module.

Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:

• Control of DCE

• GPRS

• Call control

• Supplementary Service

• SIM application tool kit

The GM47 contains a large number of Ericsson-specific commands in

addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU-T

recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the

functions of the module. The Ericsson-specific commands are identified

by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description

provided below).

Note!

Only commands that are listed in the Integrator’s Manual are supported

unless otherwise stated. Other commands may be listed by the module

but these are only included for historical or legacy reasons.

1.2 Syntax Description

This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the

GM47, AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for

additional information.

1.2.1 Conventions

In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT

commands.

The name of the command that is to be entered.

The parameter values that are defined for a certain

command.

<CR>

<LF>

The command line is terminated by the Carriage

Return (or Enter key) or ATS3 command.

Line feed character or ATS4 command.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

< >

[ ]

The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical

element. The brackets do not appear in the command

line.

Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item

is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a

command or an optional part of a response. The

brackets do not appear in the command line.

Value

The default values of the supported parameters are

indicated by using bold text when presenting the

value.

• Other characters, including ‘?’, ‘=’, parenthesis, etc., appear in

commands and responses as written.

• The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and

CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.2.3, A T R esponse Syntax and

1.3, Error Codes) are not listed under “Possible Responses” for each

AT command.

• OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.

1.2.2 AT Command Syntax

The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command

is made up of the following three elements:

• the prefix;

• the body;

• the termination character.

The prefix consists of the letters “AT”, which are derived from the first

two letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command,

the parameter, and if applicable the associated values.

Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces

between the individual bodies are ignored.

Basic Syntax Command

The format of basic syntax commands is as follows:

AT<command>[=][<parameter>]<CR>

Example! ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker)

Additional commands may follow a command on the same command

line without any character being required for separation. For the

command D parameters, see the description for the command in

question.

A version of the basic syntax is:

AT<command><parameter>

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS

Extended Syntax Command

• AT+<command>= [<parameter>]

• AT*<command>=[<parameter>]

Example! AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the module)

If several values are included in the command, they are separated by

commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values.

Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the

same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the

preceeding extended command as a separator.

Read Command Syntax

The read command is used to check the current values of

parameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line:

• AT+<command>?

• AT*<command>?

• AT<command>?

Example! AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)

<CR>“IRA”<CR>(information text response)

<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)

Test Command Syntax

The test command is used to test whether the command has been

implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it

contains. Type ‘?’, after the command line:

• AT+<command>=?

• AT*<command>=?

Example! AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response

parameters)

<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)

<CR>OK<CR> (final result code)

If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR

is issued.

Note!

Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of

supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the

parameter values.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

1.2.3 AT Response Syntax

The default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See the

command V for further details.

Possible formats for the result codes are:

• Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has

a numerical equivalent.

• Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an

asterisk (*):

– AT+<command>: <parameter >

– AT*<command>: <parameter>

where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single

space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>.

If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by

commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The

extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are

always issued in alphabetical form.

• Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by

<CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by

looking for a final result code response, such as OK.

There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:

Final Result Code

A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command

is completed and another command may be issued.

• If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result

code OK.

• If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had

the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is

ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an

error code.

Final result codes are:

Value

General meaning

Command executed, no errors

Invalid command or command line too long

No dialling possible, wrong mode

Remote station busy

ERROR

NO DIALTONE

BUSY

NO ANSWER

NO CARRIER

Connection completion time-out

Link not established or disconnected

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS

Unsolicited Result Code

Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly

associated with a command being issued from the TE.

1.3 Error Codes

1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)

This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If

+CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a

command line, none of the commands in the same command line will

be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a

result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can

be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE

command.

The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.

<err>

Description Syntax

Phone failure

No connection to phone

Phone -adaptor link reserved

Operation not allowed

Operation not supported

PH-SIM PIN required

SIM not inserted

SIM PIN required

SIM PUK required

SIM failure

SIM busy

SIM wrong

Incorrect password

SIM PIN2 required

SIM PUK2 required

Memory full

Invalid index

Not found

Memory failure

Text string too long

Invalid characters in text string

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<err>

Description Syntax

Dial string too long

Invalid characters in dial string

No network service

Network time-out

Network not allowed - emergency calls only

100

101- 255

Unknown

Reserved by ETS

1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code)

This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or

to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code.

None of the following commands in the same command line will be

executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR

is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid

parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails.

The syntax is as follows:

+CMS ERROR: <err>

Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.

<err>

Description

0 - 127

128 - 255

300

GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values

GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values

ME failure

301

SMS service of ME reserved

Operation not allowed

Operation not supported

Invalid PDU mode parameter

Invalid text mode parameter

SIM not inserted

302

303

304

305

310

311

SIM PIN required

312

PH-SIM PIN required

SIM failure

313

314

SIM busy

315

SIM wrong

316

SIM PUK required

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS

<err>

Description

317

318

320

321

322

330

331

332

340

500

- 511

512-

SIM PIN2 required

SIM PUK2 required

Memory failure

Invalid memory index

Memory full

SMSC address unknown

No network service

Network time-out

No +CNMA acknowledgment expected

Unknown error

Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved

Manufacturer specific

1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands

For many of the more complicated commands, examples are provided

after the command’s description. Always refer to the detailed

description of the command in question to check valid parameter

values, AT command syntax and Response syntax.

1.5 SMS Text Mode

SMS text mode allows users to send SMSs without having to

understand how PDUs are constructed. This section describes how to

carry out basic operations in text mode and explains the steps that need

to be taken.

Basic transmission of SMS

A script which sets the module up is shown below:

AT+CSDH=1

Enable the use of text mode parameters

AT+CSMP=17,167

Set text mode parameter

AT+CMGF=1

Switch the module to text mode

AT+CMGS=“07787154042”

Sending an SMS

> Test SMSÎ

The text must be ended, as in PDU mode, with

a control-Z character

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

+CMGS: 204

sdfjldjfl

Confirmation that the SMS has been sent

successfully

Note the following points:

1. Once the CSDH, CSMP and CMGF commands have been carried

out they will not need to be initialized for this session.

2. These parameters are saved in NVRAM using the &W command.

Notification of SMS

New message indications are similar to the PDU mode as shown below:

AT+CNMI=3,1

+CMTI: “SM”,2

AT+CNMI=3,2

+CMT: “+447747008670”,“Matt

L”,“02/11/19,09:58:42+00”,145,36,0,0,“+447785016005”

,145,8

Test sms

Please note that currently the CMT indication does not have a CR/LF

appended to the end of the SMS data. If the SMS contains one it will be

displayed. Otherwise the application will need to recognize the CMT

line and the length character, in this case 8 and count the characters into

its input buffer.

Reading messages

Reading messages is performed as in PDU mode.

AT+CMGR=2

+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/11/

19,09:57:28+00”,145,36,0,0,“

+447785016005”,145,8

Test sms

Listing messages

In PDU mode numbers are used as parameters. In text mode letters are

used instead and these must be upper case as the module does not accept

lower case commands. See the example below:

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS

AT+CMGL=“ALL”

+CMGL: 1,“REC READ”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/10/

21,10:07:23+04”,145,4

Test

+CMGL: 2,“REC READ”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/11/

19,09:57:28+00”,145,8

Test sms

+CMGL: 3,“REC UNREAD”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/11/

19,09:58:06+00”,145,8

Test sms

1.6 GPRS Communication

To initiate a session with the network you need to setup a ‘data account’

on the module, using the AT+CGDCONT command. You need to

specify the correct Access Point Name (APN), which you get from your

service provider. The command below sets up the data account to access

Vodafone’s internet server.

AT+CGDCONT=1,“IP”,“internet”

After this you need to use the ATD command to make a GPRS call. The

example below dials into the network using account number 1 (the

GM47 supports up to 10):

ATD*99***1#

If the module is able to connect to the APN it will return a CONNECT.

At this point PPP/IP packets should be sent by the application, to

negotiate an IP address. The easiest way of doing this whole thing is to

create a windows dial up networking session with the dial string

*99***1# after creating the data account on the module.

It is not possible to call a mobile station using GPRS at present. The

reason for this is that unless a PDP context has been setup it has not been

assigned an IP address by the GGSN/DHCP server and as a result it

cannot be addressed other than through its phone number (defeating the

object of using IP). This is specified in GSM 7.60 or 3GPP 27.060.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Call Control

2.1 AT+CPIN

PIN Control

See 3.26, AT+CPIN PIN Control

2.2 ATA

Answer Incoming Call

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Answer an incoming

call

ATA

• CONNECT

• CONNECT <text>

• NO CARRIER

• ERROR

• OK

Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.

<text>

Description

19200

9600

4800

2400

Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)

Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s

Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s

Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.3 ATD

Dial

Description

Command

Possible Responses

• Originate a call and

dial the phone

number specified in

the command as

<dial_string>

ATD<dial_string>[;]

• CONNECT

• CONNECT <text>

• NO CARRIER

• ERROR

• NO DIAL TONE

• BUSY

• Do a network

detect

• OK

Dial the phone number

stored in the mobile

phone which is

located by the index

ATD>ME[;]

ATD>SM[;]

ATD>LD[;]

• CONNECT

• CONNECT <text>

• NO CARRIER

• ERROR

• NO DIAL TONE

• BUSY

• OK

Dial the phone number

stored in the SIM card

which is located by the

index

• CONNECT

• CONNECT <text>

• NO CARRIER

• ERROR

• NO DIAL TONE

• BUSY

• OK

Dial the phone number

stored in the Last

dialled number list on

the SIM card, which is

located by the index

The most recently

dialled number is

assumed to have

="1"

• CONNECT

• CONNECT <text>

• NO CARRIER

• ERROR

• NO DIAL TONE

• BUSY

• OK

Redial the last phone

number dialled.

Ericsson specific

ATDL[;]

...

Used to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phone

number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish

the connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored number

specification.

If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that

the number is a voice rather than a data number.

If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the command

instructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OK

is returned.

Abortability:

Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from

the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be

sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. CALL CONTROL

transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the

termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append

additional control characters such as line feed after the command line

termination character.

<dial_string>

Description

“0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 * # +”

Valid characters for origination

The W modifier is ignored but is included only for

compatibility purposes

The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for

compatibility purposes

The T modifier is ignored but is included only for

compatibility purposes

The P modifier is ignored but is included only for

compatibility purposes

<Final Result

Code>

Description

CONNECT

If connection is successfully established, only valid for data

connections

CONNECT

<text>

If connection is successfully established, only valid for data

connections

NO CARRIER

Unable to establish a connection or the connection

attempt was aborted by the user

ERROR

An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the

connection

NO DIALTONE

BUSY

The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is not

within coverage of the network

The phone number called is engaged, valid for data and

voice connections

Only valid for voice connections

<text>

Description

19200

9600

4800

2400

Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)

Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s

Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s

Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s

Example

ATD07747008670;

AT+VTS=“4”

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.4 ATH

2.5 ATL

Hang up

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Terminate the call

ATH

• ERROR

• OK

Signals the MS to terminate an active call.

Monitor Speaker Loudness

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request monitor

speaker loudness

ATL[<value>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATL?

L: <value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATL=?

L: (list of supported

<values>s)

Included for compatibity. No functionality

<value>

Description

-14dB (minimum speaker volume)

-10.5dB

-7dB

-3.5dB

0dB (nominal speaker volume)

3.5dB

7dB

10.5dB

14dB (maximum speaker volume)

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. CALL CONTROL

2.6 ATO

Return to Online Data Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Return to on-line data

mode

ATO[<value>]

• CONNECT

• CONNECT <text>

• NO CARRIER

• ERROR

Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during

an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.

<value>

Description

Return to on-line data state from on-line command

2.7 ATP

Select Pulse Dialling

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Select pulse dialling

ATP

Show if the command

is supported

ATP=?

Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It

would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling

the number.

2.8 ATT

Select Tone Dialling

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Select tone dialling

ATT

Show if the command

is supported

ATT=?

Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It

would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling

the number.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.9 ATX

Call Progress Monitoring Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set call progress

monitoring control

ATX=[<n>] or ATX[<n>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATX?

X: <n>

Show if the command

is supported

ATX=?

X: (list of supported

<n>s)

Defines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be used

during a call set-up.

<n>

Description

Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reported

on connection

Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on

connection

Busy detection on and dial tone detection off. Report line

speed on connection

Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed on

connection

Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report line

speed on connection. Default value

Note!

If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if “NO

DIALTONE” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipient

is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or “NO CARRIER”

will be returned.

2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request hang-up

AT+CHUP

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the commands

is supported

AT+CHUP=?

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME.

If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming

call shall be rejected.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. CALL CONTROL

2.11 AT+CMOD Call Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request Call Mode

AT+CMOD=[<mode>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CMOD?

• +CMOD: <mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMOD=?

• +CMOD: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects the call mode of further dialing commands (D) or for next

answering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. In

this ETS, terms “alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to all

GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic

service (voice, data, fax) within one call.

When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-up

procedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU-T

Recommendations V.25ter, T.31 and T.32. In GSM there can be voice

followed by data (refer to GSM 02.02), alternating voice/data (refer to

GSM 02.02) and alternating voice/fax calls (refer to GSM 02.03).

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

Note!

+CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating mode

call. It is set to zero also after a failed answering. The power-up, factory

(&F) and user resets (Z), also set the value to zero. This reduces the

possibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answered

accidentally.

<mode>

Description

Single mode. Default value.

In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of

alternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in following

cases:

- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;

- after a unsuccessful answering;

- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

2.12 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Command

+CVHU=[<mode>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

Show the current

setting

+CVHU?

• +CVHU: <mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

+CVHU=?

+CVHU: (list of

supported <mode>s)

Selects whether ATH or “drop DTR” causes a voice connection to be

disconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating mode

calls that are currently in voice mode.

Note!

When <mode>=2, this command must be viewed in conjunction with

the V.25ter command &D, or &D will be ignored.

<mode>

Description

“Drop DTR” ignored but OK response given. ATH

disconnects

“Drop DTR” and ATH ignored but OK response given

“Drop DTR” behavior according to &D setting. ATH

disconnects. Default value

2.13 AT+VTS

DTMF and Tone Generation

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request transmission of

DTMF tone(s)

AT+VTS=<DTMF>

ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+VTS=?

ERROR

This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tones

may be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording

period. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, the

command does not operate in data or fax modes of operation

(+FCLASS=0,1,2-7).

Note!

The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is not possible to

generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command.

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. CALL CONTROL

Note!

The AT+VTS command is used only during a voice call.

<DTMF>

Description

ASCII

character

string

An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, #, *, A-

D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted as a

single ASCII character.

Example: The string “8,9” sends two DTMF tones, “8”

followed by “9”

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

100

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Control and Status

3.1 ATQ

Result Code Suppression

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Result Code

Suppression

ATQ[=]<value>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATQ?

Q: <value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATQ=?

Q: (list of supported

<value>s)

Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE.

When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate,

final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or

trailer - is transmitted.

<value>

Description

DCE transmits result codes. Default value

Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted

3.2 ATS0

Automatic Answer Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Automatic answer

control

ATS0=[<rcnt>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS0?

<rcnt>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS0=?

S0: (list of supported

<rcnt>s)

Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zero

value specifies the number of rings before the call is answered.

Note!

Call is always answered in the current fax class, regardless of whether

the incoming call is voice, data, or fax.

<rcnt>

Description

Disable automatic answer. Default value

1-7

Answer after the specified number of rings

101

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.3 ATS2

Escape Sequence Character

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set escape sequence

character

ATS2=[<esc>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS2?

<esc>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS2=?

S2: (list of supported

<esc>s)

Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when

switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The

response to the command is modified to reflect the change.

<esc>

Description

Escape sequence character. Default value

0 to 255

Escape sequence character

Note!

If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, the

escape sequence detection is disabled.

3.4 ATS3

Command Line Termination Character

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Command Line

Termination Character

ATS3=<value>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS3?

<value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS3=?

S3: (list of supported

<value>s)

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character

recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming

command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header,

trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with

the S4 parameter.

The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line

termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3

setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3

as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3

was previously set to 13 and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued,

102

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but

the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5

2/14) in place of the <CR>.

<value>

Description

Command line termination character, Default value

0 to 127

Command line termination character

3.5 ATS4

Response Formatting Character

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Response

Formatting Character

ATS4=<value>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS4?

<value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS4=?

S4: (list of supported

<value>s)

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character

generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for

result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the

description of the V parameter for usage).

If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued

in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.

<value>

Description

Formatting character. Default value

Note: ASCII character 10 is equivalent to <LF>

0 to 127

Formatting character

103

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.6 ATS5

Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request Command

Line Editing Character

ATS5=<value>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS5?

<value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS5=?

S5: (list of supported

<value>s)

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character

recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the

immediately preceding character.

<value>

Description

Line editing character. Default value

0 to 127

Line editing character

3.7 ATS6

Blind Dial Delay Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Blind dial delay control

ATS6=[<dly>]

ATS6?

Show the current

setting

<dly>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS6=?

S6: (list of supported

<dly>s)

Included for compatibility. No functionality

<dly>

Description

Wait two seconds before blind dialling. Default value

2-255

Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling

104

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

3.8 ATS7

Connection Completion Timeout

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set connection

completion timeout

ATS7=[<tmo>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS7?

<tmo>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS7=?

S7: (list of supported

<tmo>s)

Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and

the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the

connection is aborted.

<tmo>

Description

Timeout value in seconds. Default value

1-255

Timeout value in seconds

3.9 ATS8

Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Comma Dial

Modifier Delay Control

ATS8=[<dly>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS8?

<dly>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS8=?

S8: (list of supported

<dly>s)

Included for compatibility. No functionality

<dly>

Description

The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value

1-255

The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds

105

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.10 ATS10

Automatic Disconnect Delay Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Automatic

Disconnect Delay

Control

ATS10=[<val>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATS10?

<val>

Show if the command

is supported

ATS10=?

S10: (list of supported

<val>s)

Included for compatibility. No functionality

<val>

Description

Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value

1-254

Number of tenths of a second of delay

3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Call Monitoring on

or off

AT*ECAM=<onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ECAM?

• *ECAM: <onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ECAM=?

• *ECAM: list of

supported <onoff>s

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in

the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs

about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc.

It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result

code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is

two fold:

• to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;

106

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

• to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an

ongoing call.

<onoff>

Description

The call log function is disabled (off). Default value

The call log function is enabled (on)

Unsolicited result codes:

*ECAV: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>,[<processid>],[<exitcause>],

[<number>,<type>]

<ccid>

Description

1 to 7

Integer type. A number which uniquely defines a call in

the phone (= number of call control process). There can

not be two call id’s with the same number simultaneously.

The maximum number of call control processes are 7,

which are 5 multiparty members, one call on hold, and

one waiting call

Description

Idle

Calling (MO)

Connecting (MO)

Active (connection between A and B)

Hold

Waiting (MT)

Alerting (MT)

Busy

Description

Voice

Data

128

Voice2

Description

Integer

Reported when returning to the Idle state (<ccstatus>=0)

8 = H’08 = CC (Call Control)

68 = H’44 = MM (Mobile Management)

69 = H’45 = MS (Mobile Station)

122 = H’7A = RR (Radio Resources)

107

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

Integer

Exit cause according to GSM 04.08 reported when

returning to Idle state (<ccstatus> = 0)

Description

String

String type phone number of format specified by <type>.

Only valid for <ccstatus> = 1 (Calling)

<type>

Description

Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM

04.08, subclause 10.5.4.7)

129

145

ISDN/Telephony numbering plan, national/international

unknown. Default if no “+” in sca

ISDN/Telephony numbering plan, international number.

Default if “+” in sca.

161

ISDN/Telephony numbering plan, national number

128 to 255

Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7. Only valid

for <ccstatus> = 1 (Calling)

Examples

AT*ECAM?

*ECAM: 0

AT*ECAM=1

3.12 AT*EDST

Ericsson Daylight Saving Time

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Daylight Saving

Time

AT*EDST=<dst>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EDST?

• *EDST: <dst>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EDST=?

• *EDST: (list of

supported <dst>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command sets the daylight saving time hours.

108

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

Note!

This command affects the MS clock set with the AT+CCLK command.

To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time (DST)

is set with this command before setting the actual local time with

AT+CCLK.

<dst>

Description

Standard time

Daylight saving time, +1 hour

Daylight saving time, +2 hours

3.13 AT*EMAR

Ericsson Master Reset

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Perform a master reset

in the MS

AT*EMAR=<phone lock

code>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EMAR=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the

MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the

MS.

Description

String

Security code (phone lock code) must be verified

before performing the master reset, see also

AT+CLCK

109

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.14 AT*EPEE

Ericsson Pin Event

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Requests the MS to

inform when the PIN

code has been

inserted

AT*EPEE=<onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EPEE?

• *EPEE: <onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EPEE=?

• *EPEE: (list of

supported <onoff>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been

inserted and accepted.

<onoff>

Description

Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated

(off). Default value

Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on)

3.15 AT*ESMM Ericsson Settings Minute Minder

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the Minute Minder

to on or off

AT*ESMM=<mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ESMM?

• *ESMM: <mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESMM=?

• *ESMM: list of

supported <mode>s

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command sets the minute minder setting to “on” or “off” in the

MS. Test command returns the <mode> value. When set to “on”, a beep

is sent to the audio output every minute.

<mode>

Description

OFF, minute minder off. Default value

ON, minute minder on

110

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

3.16 AT+CALA Set Alarm

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set an alarm time in

the ME

AT+CALA=<time>[,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

[,<recurr>[,<silent>]]]

]]

Show the current

setting

AT+CALA?

• +CALA:

<time1>,<n1>,<type1>,[<t

ext1>],[<recurr1>],<silent1

>[<CR><LF>+CALA:

<time2>,<n2>,<type2>,[<t

ext2>],[<recurr2>],<silent2

>[…]]+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CALA=?

• +CALA: (list of supported

<n>s),(list of supported

type>s),<tlength>,<rlengt

h>,(list of supported

<silent>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The command sets an alarm time in the ME. An array of different

alarms can be set and each may be recurrent. If alarm setting fails,

ERROR: <err> is returned.

When the alarm is timed out and executed, the unsolicited result code

+CALV: <n> is always returned, even if the alarm is setup to be silent.

The alarm time is set in hours and minutes. Date, seconds and time zone

cannot be set.

The alarm function uses the ring type defined with the AT*ERIN

command.

The read command returns the list of current active alarm settings in the

ME.

Show returns the supported array index values, alarm types and

maximum length of the text strings.

<time>

Description

string type

value

Refer to the AT+CCLK command. Note! Only hours and

minutes are used i.e. date, time zone and seconds are not

used

<n>

Description

Integer type

Index identifying an active alarm

111

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Note!

The number of active alarms is manufacturer and product specific.

Description

Integer type

Maximum length of <text> parameter

The maximum length of the <text> parameter is manufacturer and

product specific.

Description

Format:

“<1..7>[,<1..7>

[…]]”

For setting an alarm for one or more days in the week. The

digits 1 to 7 correspond to the days in the week, Monday

(1), …, Sunday (7). Example: The string “1,2,3,4,5” may be

used for setting an alarm for all weekdays

Format:“0”

For setting an alarm for all days in the week

Description

Integer type

Maximum length of the <recurr> parameter

Unsolicited result codes:

+CALV: <n>

3.17 AT+CALD Alarm Delete

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Delete an alarm

AT+CALD=<n>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CALD=?

• +CALD: (list of

supported <n>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command removes an active alarm.

<n>

Description

Integer type

Index identifying an active alarm

112

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

3.18 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set the real time clock

of the ME

AT+CCLK=<time>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CCLK?

• +CCLK: <time>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CCLK=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME

ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting

of the clock.

<time>

Description

string type

value

Format is “yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters

indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes,

seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,

expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time

and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00

GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”

NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone information

then the three last characters of <time> are not returned

by +CCLK?

Example

AT+CCLK?

+CCLK: “00/01/01,22:54:48+00”

AT+CCLK=“19/11/02,09:30:00+00”

113

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.19 AT+CEER

Extended Error Report

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request an Extended

Error Report

AT+CEER

• +CEER: <report>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CEER=?

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>.

Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure

information given by the GSM network in text format.

Description

characters

The total number of characters, including line terminators,

in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters.

Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>

3.20 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set MS functionality

AT+CFUN=<fun>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT+CFUN?

• +CFUN: <fun>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CFUN=?

• +CFUN: (list of

supported <fun>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS. Level “full

functionality” results in the highest level of power drawn. “Minimum

functionality” results in the minimum power drawn. Manufacturers may

also specify levels of functionality between these two end levels.

Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound.

“AT+CFUN=” is interpreted as “AT+CFUN=0”.

Note!

<fun>

Description

Minimum functionality. Default value

Note: The ME is turned off

Full functionality.

Note: If previously turned off, the phone is turned on

114

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

3.21 AT+CIND

Indicator Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Indicator

Control

AT+CIND=[<ind>

[,<ind>[,…]]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CIND?

• +CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CIND=?

• +CIND: (<descr>,(list of

supported <ind>s)),

(<descr>,(list of supported

<ind>s)),…

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Used to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the

indicator is off (or in state which can be identified as “off” state), 1

means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than

“off” state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a

simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The number of

elements is ME specific. If the ME does not allow setting of indicators

or it is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If a

certain indicator is not writable, it cannot be set. If the parameter is an

empty field, the indicator will keep the previous value.

Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum

16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the

allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable,

+CME ERROR: <err> is returned (refer to GSM 07.07).

<ind>

Description

Integer type

Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>

<descr>

Description

“signal”

Signal quality (0-5)

“service”

“sounder”

“message”

“call”

Service availability (0-1)

Sounder activity (0-1)

Message received (0-1)

Call in progress (0-1)

Roaming indicator (0-1)

“roam”

“sms full”

A short message memory storage in the MT has become full

(1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is

(0-1)

115

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.22 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands

Command

Possible Responses

+CLAC

<AT Command1> [<CR> <LF> <AT Command2>[…]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

+CLAC=?

+CME ERROR: <err>

Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands. This

command has the same functionality as AT*.

Note!

This command only returns the AT commands that are available to the

user.

3.23 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request GSM Mobile

Equipment Error

Control

AT+CMEE=[<n>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CMEE?

• +CMEE: <n>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMEE=?

• +CMEE: (list of

supported <n>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an

indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When

enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result

code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is

returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or

TA functionality. For more information, refer to “+CME ERROR

(Mobile Equipment Error Code)”, page 85.

<n>

Description

Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR

instead. Default value

Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric

<err> values (see page 85)

Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose

<err> values (see page 85)

116

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

3.24 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Phone

Activity Status

AT+CMER=[<mode> • +CME ERROR: <err>

[,<keyp>[,<disp>

[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CMER?

• +CMER:

<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMER=?

• +CMER: (list of supported s),

(list of supported

<keyp>s),(list of supported

<disp>s),(list of supported

<ind>s),(list of supported

<bfr>s)

• OK

• ERROR

The command enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result

codes from the ME to the TE in the case of key pressings, display

changes, and indicator state changes. <mode> controls the processing

of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr>

controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered.

If the ME does not support setting, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

Test command returns the modes supported by the TA as compound

values.

<mode>

Description

Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code

buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place

or the oldest ones can be discarded

Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE

link specific inband technique used to embed result

codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode

<keyp>

Description

No keypad event reporting

Keypad event reporting using result code +CKEV:

<key>,<press>. Enables keypad event reporting of all key

pressings

Note: When this mode is enabled, corresponding result

codes of all keys currently pressed will be flushed to the TA

regardless of <bfr> setting

<disp>

Description

No display event reporting

117

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<ind>

Description

No indicator event reporting

Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:

<ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number

(as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of

indicator. Only those indicator events, which are not

caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE

<bfr>

Description

TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this

command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered

Unsolicited Result Codes:

+CKEV: <key>,<press>

+CIEV: <ind>,<value>

3.25 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Execute Phone Activity

Status

AT+CPAS[=<mode>]

• +CPAS: <pas>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CPAS=?

• +CPAS:

(list of supported

<pas>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate

the ME before requesting action from the phone.

When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the

command returns <pas> values from 0 to 128 (for supported values see

table below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with

the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericsson

specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the

table below).

118

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound

value: refer to GSM 07.07.

<pas>

Description

Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE)

Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the

ringer is active)

Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but

a call is in progress)

129

130

Not in call

Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘call

in progress’

131

Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to

‘call in progress’

<mode>

Description

Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values,

such as 129, 130 and 131

Example

AT+CPAS=?

+CPAS: (0,3,4,129,130,131)

AT+CPAS

+CPAS: 0

119

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.26 AT+CPIN

PIN Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request PIN Control

AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new

pin>]

• +CME ERROR:

<err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CPIN?

• +CPIN: <code>

• +CME ERROR:

<err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CPIN=?

• +CME ERROR:

<err>

• +CPIN: (supported

<code>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME

operational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be entered

twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is

pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message

(+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE.

If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,

<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM.

Note!

Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the ME

has a pending request for SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI,

+CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.

Description

string

The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 - 8

digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits

<code>

Description

READY

SIM PIN

SIM PUK

ME is not pending for any password

ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given

ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given

120

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

<code>

Description

PH-SIM PIN

SIM PIN2

ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be given

ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> is

recommended to be returned only when the last

executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication

failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered

correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME does

not block its operation

SIM PUK2

ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> is

recommended to be returned only when the last

executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication

failure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not

entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended that

ME does not block its operation.

BLOCKED

The SIM cards is blocked for the user

<err>

Description

Phone failure

PH-SIM PIN required

SIM not inserted

SIM PIN required

SIM PUK required

SIM failure

100

SIM busy

SIM wrong

Incorrect password

Text string too long

Invalid characters in text string

Unknown

Example

AT+CPIN=“0000”

121

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.27 AT+CPWD Change Password

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request facility lock

AT+CPWD=<fac>,

<oldpwd>,

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CPWD=?

• +CPWD:

(<fac1>,<pwdlength1>),

(<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),

…

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command

Facility Lock +CLCK.

Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available

facilities and the maximum length of their password.

<fac>

Description

“PS”

PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when

other than current SIM card inserted)

“SC”

SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up

and when this lock command issued)

“P2”

“AO”

“OI”

SIM PIN2

BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)

BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88

clause 1)

“AI”

“IR”

BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)

BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the

home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)

“OX”

BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to

Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)

“AB”

“AG”

“AC”

All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)

All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)

All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)

Description

string type

<oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the

facility from the ME user interface or with the change

password command, +CPWD

Description

string type

<newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of

password can be determined with <pwdlength>

122

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

Description

Integer type

Maximum length of the password for the facility

<err>

Description

Phone failure

Operation not allowed

PH-SIM PIN required

SIM not inserted

SIM PIN required

SIM PUK required

SIM failure

100

101..255

SIM busy

SIM wrong

Incorrect password

SIM PIN2 required

SIM PUK2 required

Text string too long

Invalid characters in text string

Unknown

Reserved by ETS

Example

AT+CPWD=“SC”,“0000”,“0001”

123

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.28 AT+CR

Service Reporting Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Service Reporting

Control

AT+CR=<mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CR?

• +CR: <mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CR=?

• +CR: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports

during the handshake phase.

<mode>

Description

Disable reporting. Default value

Enable reporting

Intermediate Result Codes:

+CR: <serv>

3.29 AT+CRC

Cellular Result Code

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Cellular Result

Code option

AT+CRC=[<mode>]

AT+CRC?

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

• +CRC: <mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CRC=?

• +CRC: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Command controls whether or not;

• the extended format of incoming call indication;

• or GPRS network request for PDP context activation;

• or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used.

When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited

result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.

124

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

<mode>

Description

Disables extended format

Enables extended format

Unsolicited Result Codes:

+CRING: <type>

3.30 AT+CSAS

Save Settings

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Save Settings

AT+CSAS[=<profile>]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CSAS=?

• +CSAS: (list of supported

<profile>s)

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TA

can contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commands

Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and

Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are

saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIM

SMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved.

Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading

and writing of settings.

Description

0..255

Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are

to be stored. Default value is 0

125

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

3.31 AT+CSQ

Signal Strength

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Show the Signal

Strength

AT+CSQ

• +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CSQ=?

• +CSQ: (list of

supported

<rssi>s),(list of

supported <ber>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit

error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported

by the TA as compound values.

<rssi>

Description

–113dBm or less

–111dBm

2..30

–109… –53dBm

–51dBm or greater

Not known or not detectable

<ber>

Description

0..7

As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 subclause

8.2.4

Not known or not detectable

Example

AT+CSQ

+CSQ: 13,99

126

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. CONTROL AND STATUS

3.32 AT+CTZU

Automatic Time Zone Update

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Enable and disable

automatic time zone

update via NITZ

AT+CTZU=<onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CTZU?

• +CTZU: <onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CTZU=?

• +CTZU: (list of

supported <onoff>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. If

setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.

<onoff>

Description

The automatic time zone update is disabled (off). Default

value

The automatic time zone update is enabled (on)

127

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

128

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Audio

Note!

*E2EAMS and *E2APR are new commands that replace the

funtionality offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAM

commands. Use the new commands in new applications. The old

commands are included for compatibility.

4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request

operation

with audio

profile

AT*E2EAMS= <op>[,<TxPGA>, • ERROR

<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,

<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,

<TxAGC>,<Volume>,

• OK

<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,

<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,

<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,

<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,

<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,

<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,

<AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]

Show the

current

setting

AT*E2EAMS?

• *E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,

<RxPGA>,

<SideToneGain>,

<AuxInGain>,

<MicInGain>,

<TxAGC>,<Volume>,

<MaxVolume>,

<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,

<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,

<HFAlgorithm>,

<LocalAudio>,

<TxGainLow>,

<MicVolt2V>,

<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,

<EchoCancel>,

• ERROR

Show if the

command

is supported

AT*E2EAMS=?

• *E2EAMS:

(list of supported <op>s)

• ERROR

This command allows the modification and configuration of the current

audio profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines

the way in which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switch

setting are configured. There are several audio profiles available in

non-volatile storage, and the current profile can be modified by use of

the AT*E2APR command.

The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:

129

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

• configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in a

comma separated list;

• set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;

• save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the current

profile number (see AT*E2APR).

The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read

command AT*E2EAMS?

Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR.

Abortability:

This command may not be aborted.

Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio

circuit are affected by the various parameters.

CODEC

DSP

Speech

decoder

F/R

ATMS

PCMOUT

PCMULD

AuxInGain

MicInGain

TxPGA

TxGainLow

TxPCM

MicPath

switches

MICP

MICN

SideTone

Gain

Handsfree

EchoCancel

NoiseRed

SideTone

switch

Aux Amp

Ear Amp

SpkPath

switches

PCMIN

PCMDLD

Encoder

F/R

RxPGA

Volume

RxPCM

BEARP

BEARN

Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODEC

130

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

<op>

Description

Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>)

Set <TxPGA>

Set <RxPGA>

Set <SideToneGain>

Set <AuxInGain>

Set <MicInGain>

Set <TxAGC>

Set <Volume>

Set <MaxVolume>

Set <MicPath>

255

Set <SpkPath>

Set <TxPCM>

Set <RxPCM>

Set <HFAlgorithm>

Set <LocalAudio>

Set <TxGainLow>

Set <MicVolt2V>

Set <SideTone>

Set <NoiseRed>

Set <EchoCancel>

Set <AnalogRing>

Save current profile to non-volatile storage at current

profile number

<TxPGA>,

<RxPGA>

Description

-5dB PGA gain

-2.5dB PGA gain

0dB PGA gain

2.5dB PGA gain

131

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<TxPGA>,

Description

<RxPGA>

5dB PGA gain

7.5dB PGA gain

–7.5dB PGA gain

–10dB PGA gain

<SideToneGain> Description

10dB

13dB

16dB

19dB

22dB

25dB

Description

MUTE

13dB

34dB

46dB

Description

MUTE

13dB

25dB

34dB

46dB

Description

0dB

3dB

6dB

132

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

<Volume>,

Description

MUTE

1-9

Volume levels 1-9

<MicPath>,

Description

OFF

MUTE

Internal (using microphone/speaker)

External (using ATMS/AFMS)

<TxPCM>,

<RxPCM>

Description

13bit PCM

16bit PCM

Description

No handsfree

Advanced handsfree

Switching handsfree

No handsfree handheld

No handsfree external

Description

Local audio mode off

Local audio microphone/no speaker

Local audio no microphone/speaker

Local audio microphone/speaker

Description

Tx gain normal

Tx gain –7dB

133

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

Microphone voltage at 2.5V

Microphone voltage at 2V

<SideTone>,

Description

<NoiseRed>,

<EchoCancel>,

OFF

Examples

AT*E2EAMS=?

*E2EAMS=(0-21,255)

Current default profile is 0:

AT*E2EAMS?

*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1

Sets current profile with these settings:

AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1

Sets TxPGA gain to 0dB:

AT*E2EAMS=1,2

Turns analog ringing off:

AT*E2EAMS=20,0

Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:

AT*E2EAMS=255

134

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

4.2 AT*E2APR

M2M Audio Profile Manipulation

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request operation

with audio profile

AT*E2APR=

[,<prnum2>]]

• ERROR

• OK

• *E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,

<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,

<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,

<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,

<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,

<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,

<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,

<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,

<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT*E2APR?

•

*E2APR: current <prnum>

ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2APR=?

• *E2APR: (list of supported

<op>s), (list of supported

<prnum1>s), (list of supported

<prnum2>s)

• ERROR

This command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio

“profiles” stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd

parameters depend on the operation being carried out.

Using the command you can:

• Set one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile.

This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.

• Read one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profile

number defined will be displayed.

• Copy all parameters from one profile into another.

• Reset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults for

the profile:

- 0 is the handset profile,

- 1 is the portable handsfree profile,

- 2 is the car kit profile.

• Set a profile as the default profile on next power up.

<op>

Description

Set profile <prnum1> to set as current

Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>

Read profile <prnum1> settings

Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default

Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as defautl

profile in NVM, and use it as default from next power on

135

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<prnum1>,

Description

Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default value

Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree)

Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit)

Examples

AT*E2APR=?

*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2)

Current default profile is profile 0:

AT*E2APR?

*E2APR: 0

Set audio profile now used to profile 1:

AT*E2APR=0,1

Audio profile 1 settings:

AT*E2APR=1,1

*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0

Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:

AT*E2APR=2,1,2

Reset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the current

audio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:

AT*E2APR=3,1

Sets profile number 1 as the default when module is powered on:

AT*E2APR=4,1

136

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

4.3 AT*EALR

Ericsson Audio Line Request

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request the audio lines

(ATMS,AFMS)

AT*EALR=<mode>

[,<activation>

[,<aud_status>]]

• *EALR: <mode>,

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EALR?

*EALR:

<mode>,<activation>,

<resp>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EALR=?

*EALR:(list of supported

<mode>s,

<activation>s and

<aud_status>s

parameters)

Included for compatibility. No functionality.

<mode>

Description

No request for ATMS or AFMS

Request ATMS and not AFMS

Request AFMS and not ATMS

Request ATMS and AFMS

Description

Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordless

portable hands free)

Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle hands

free)

<aud_status>

Description

No change of the audio status

Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of both

the audio lines and the call to the phone

Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both the

audio lines and the call

<resp>

Description

Disable ATMS and AFMS

Enable ATMS and disable AFMS

Disable ATMS and enable AFMS

Enable ATMS and AFMS

137

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

4.4 AT*EAMS

Ericsson Audio Mode Selection

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the audio

mode for the

application

AT*EAMS=<internal_voice_al

g>[,<noise_reduction>

[,<side tone>

• OK

• ERROR

[,<short_echo_canceling>

[,<ATMS_gain>

[,<class>

[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation

_from_class>

[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation

_from_class>]]]]]]]

Show the

current

setting

AT*EAMS?

*EAMS:<internal_voice_alg

>, <noise_reduction>,

<side_tone>,

<short_echo_canceling>,

<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<AT

MS_sensitivity_deviation_fr

om_class>,<AFMS_sensitivi

ty_deviation_from_class>

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*EAMS=?

*EAMS: (list of supported

<internal_voice_alg >s,

<noise_reduction>s,

<side_tone>s,

<short_echo_canceling>s,

<AFMS_gain>s>,

<class>s,

<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio

n_from_class>s,

<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio

n_from_class>s)

Included for compatibility. No functionality.

<internal_voice_alg>

Description

None

Semi Duplex

Full Duplex

(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in the

MS contains echo cancelling)

<noise_reduction>

Description

Off

<side_tone>

Description

Off

138

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

<short_echo_canceling>

Description

Off

<ATMS_gain>

Description

Normal (0 dB) (internal voice processing)

<Class>

Description

None

Low end, class reference Hector

Mid End, class reference Scott

High End, class reference Hasse

<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>, Description

<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>

0 dB

2,5 dB

–2,5 dB

5,0 dB

–5,0 dB

4.5 AT*EARS

Ericsson Audio Ring Signal

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request analogue ring

signal in the loudspeaker

AT*EARS=<mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current setting

AT*EARS?

*EARS: <mode>

Show if the command is

supported

AT*EARS=?

*EARS: (list of

supported <mode>s)

Included for compatibility. No functionality.

<mode>

Description

Disable analogue ring signal

Enable analogue ring signal

139

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

4.6 AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set PHF functionality

AT*E2PHFB=<op>

• ERROR

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT*E2PHFB?

*E2PHFB: <op>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2PHFB=?

• *E2PHFB: (list of

supported <op>s

• ERROR

This command allows the user to set the functionality for a PHF

(portable handsfree) button, as used on simple handsfree equipment.

When set to ON, the MS will detect the shortcircuit of the ATMS and

AFMS lines, and interpret this as a PHF button press. This has the effect

of answering/hanging up a call without recourse to AT commands.

<op>

Description

Disable PHF button. Default value

Enable PHF button

4.7 AT*ELAM

Ericsson Local Audio Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set local audio mode

AT*ELAM=<mic>

[,<loudspeaker>]

• *ELAM: <mic>,

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ELAM?

*ELAM:

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ELAM=?

*ELAM: (list of

supported <mic>s and

<loudspeaker>s

parameters)

Included for compatibility. No functionality.

<mic>

Description

Off

Microphone analogue

Description

Off

Loudspeaker analogue

140

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

4.8 AT*EMIC

Ericsson Microphone Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Enables/disables the

phone microphone

AT*EMIC=<mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EMIC?

• *EMIC: <mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EMIC=?

• *EMIC: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Included for compatibility. No functionality.

<mode>

Description

Microphone is disabled (off)

Microphone is enabled (on)

4.9 AT*EMIR

Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request for mute

indications

AT*EMIR=<mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EMIR?

*EMIR: <mode>,<resp>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EMIR=?

*EMIR: (list of supported

<mode>s)

Included for compatibility. No functionality.

<mode>

Description

Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent to

the accessory

On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to the

accessory

<resp>

Description

Music mute inactive

Music mute active

141

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

4.10 AT*EPRR

Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read phone number

and ring type

AT*EPRR=<indexr>

• *EPRR:

<indexr>,<number>,

<type>,<sound

type>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EPRR=?

• *EPRR: (list of

supported

<indexr>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Returns phone number, phone number type and sound type in location

number <indexr>. If listing fails an error, +CME ERROR: <err>, is

returned.

Description

1-50

Value of location number

Description

string type

Phone number of format <type>

<type>

Description

integer format

Type of address octet

(refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7)

128

129

Unknown numbering plan, national / international number

unknown

ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international

unknown

145

ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7

161

128 - 255

Description

Off. Not supported

Low ring signal

Medium ring signal

High ring signal

Mixed ring signal

142

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

Description

Beep. Not supported

Alarm. Not supported

Calendar Tone. Not supported

Calendar Click. Not supported

Reserved. Not supported

9-10

Melody 1

12-20

21-30

31-38

39-50

Melody 2. Melody 10 reserved for pre-set melodies

Reserved for melody 11-20. Not supported

Own melody 1-8

Reserved for own melodies. Not supported

4.11 AT*EPRW

Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request Personal

Ringtype Write

command

AT*EPRW=<indexr>,

<number>,[<type>],

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EPRW=?

• *EPRW: (list of

supported

<indexr>s),<nlength

>,(list of supported

<type>s),(list of

supported <sound

type>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Writes phone number, phone number type and sound type in location

number <indexr>. It is possible to use wild cards for phone number by

substituting the digits with question marks. If writing fails an error,

+CME ERROR: <err>, is returned.

If all parameters but <indexr> are omitted, the personal ring type at

position <indexr> will be deleted.

Description

1-50

Value of location number. The location number must be

free. If the given location number is not free, ERROR is

returned

Description

string type

phone number of format <type>

143

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<type>

Description

Integer format

Type of address octet

(refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7)

128

129

Unknown numbering plan, national/international number

unknown

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

number unknown

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7

161

128 - 255

Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

Description

Off. Not supported

Low ring signal

Medium ring signal

High ring signal

Mixed ring signal

Beep. Not supported

Alarm. Not supported

Calendar Tone. Not supported

Calendar Click. Not supported

Reserved. Not supported

Melody 1

9-10

12-30

31-38

39-50

Melody 2. Melody 20 reserved for pre-set melodies

Own melody 1-8

Reserved for own melodies. Not supported

144

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

4.12 AT*ERIL

Ericsson Ring Level Set

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets ring volume for the

ring signals used for

incoming voice (L1

and L2), fax and data

calls

AT*ERIL=<volume>[,<c

all type>

[,<place>]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ERIL?

• *ERIL:

<volume1>[,<call

type1> [,<place1>

[<CR><LF>…*ERIL:

<volume n>[, <call

type n> [,<place

n>]]]]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ERIL=?

• *ERIL: (list of

supported

<volume>s)[,(list of

supported <call

type>s)

[,(list of supported

<place>s)]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Used to set the volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice,

Line 1, Line 2, fax and data calls. The parameter <place> controls the

ring level set for different types of modes. The signal volume is

specified as “step”, with an increasing volume for each signal, or as a

selected level.

Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.

Description

Off

1-6

Volume setting, not increasing ring

Volume setting, increasing ring

129-134

Description

Line 1

Line 2

Fax

Data

Alarm. Not supported

145

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<place>

Description

Hand held

Car mounted

4.13 AT*ERIN

Ericsson Ring Set

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets ring type for

AT*ERIN=

<sound type>,

[<call type>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

incoming voice (L1

and L2), fax and data

calls and alarm

Show the current

setting

AT*ERIN?

• *ERIN: <sound

type1>,<call type1>

[<CR><LF>…*ERIN:

<sound type

n>,<call type n>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ERIN=?

• *ERIN: list of

supported <sound

type>s, list of

supported <call

type>s

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Used to set sound for incoming voice, line L1 and L2, fax, data calls and

alarm. For each of the incoming call types and alarm: voice on line 1,

voice on line 2, fax calls and data calls and alarm a sound type is

selected.

The type of sound is either a ring signal, selected from a predefined set,

a melody, selected from a predefined set, or an own melody, selected

from a set specified by the user.

Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.

Description

Line 1

Line 2

Fax

Data

Alarm

146

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

Description

Off. Not supported

Low ring signal

Medium ring signal

High ring signal

Mixed ring signal

Beep. Not supported

Alarm. Not supported

Calendar Tone. Not supported

Calendar Click. Not supported

Reserved. Not supported

Melody 1. Melody 10 reserved for preset melodies

Reserved. Not supported

Own melodies 1-8

9-10

11-20

21-30

31-38

39-5

Reserved for own melodies. Not supported

4.14 AT*ERIP

Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Plays the selected

sound type at

specified volume level

AT*ERIP =

<volume>,<sound

type>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ERIP=?

• *ERIP: (list of

supported

<volume>s),(list of

supported <sound

type>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Used to play one of the sound types which are available as ring signals/

message signals on the module. The signal volume may not be chosen

as “step”; with an increasing volume for each signal. If value 1 is chosen

for parameter <volume>, nothing should happen. Signal volume may be

chosen as a selected level.

Description

Off

Step. Not Supported

Volume setting

2-n

Refer to the AT*ERIN command for the <sound type> parameter.

147

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

4.15 AT*ESMA

Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the answer mode

settings in the MS

AT*ESMA=<mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ESMA?

• *ESMA: <mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESMA=?

• *ESMA: list of

supported <mode>s

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

<mode >

Description

Answer mode is not set to “Any key”, or “Auto” (off)

Any Key mode on

Auto mode on

4.16 AT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own Melody

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the own

melodies in the

AT*ESOM=

[<melody index>],

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the

current setting

AT*ESOM?

• *ESOM: <melody index>

,<melody string 1>, <CR><LF>

……*ESOM: <melody index>,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Shows if the

command is

supported

AT*ESOM=?

• *ESOM: (list of supported

<melody index>),(list of

supported <pause>s),(list of

supported <prefix>s),(list of

supported <tone>s),

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Sets the user defined own melodies in the MS. The <prefix> and <tone>

indicates together the tone frequency and duration. The <pause> sets a

pause between tones.

148

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

Test command returns the possible values of <melody index>, <pause>,

<prefix>, <tone>, <mlength> and <mtones>.

<melody

index>

Description

1-4

Melody 1 – 4. Default setting: 1

<melody

string>

Description

string

A sequence of <tones> and <pause> entries. The <tones>

may be preceded by one or two <prefix>(s)

<pause>

Description

Pause

Description

Half tone higher

Half tone lower

(b)

One octave higher

<tones>

Description

c,d,e,f,g,a,b

C,D,E,F,G,A,B

Short tones

Long tones

Description

integer

Indicating the maximum number of tones in a melody

Description

integer

Indicating the maximum length of <melody string>

149

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

4.17 AT*EXVC

Ericsson Set External Volume Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the maximum

volume level on the

audio lines

AT*EXVC=<external

volume>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EXVC?

• *EXVC: <external

volume>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EXVC=?

• *EXVC: (list of

supported <external

volume>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Used to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehicle

handsfree controls the audio volume.

By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume over

AFMS is controlled by the phone MMI.

The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it is

connected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Once

the phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume>

setting returns to default.

<external

volume>

Description

The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS

Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum level that

is no clipping occurs. An external accessory such as a

vehicle kit controls the actual volume level heard by the

user

150

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. AUDIO

4.18 ATM

Monitor Speaker Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set monitor speaker

control

ATM[=][<speaker>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATM?

M: <speaker>

Show if the command

is supported

ATM=?

M: (list of supported

<speaker>s)

Define the activity of the speaker. This command is ignored by the

modem and is only included for compatibility.

Description

Off during the entire call. Default value

1-3

Different “on” modes

151

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

152

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Data - CSD/HSCSD

Note!

Since the module does not support V42bis compression the following

commands have not been implemented:

• AT+DS

• AT+DR

5.1 AT+CBST

Select Bearer Service Type

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Select bearer service

type

AT+CBST=[<speed>,

[<name>,[<ce>]]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CBST?

• +CBST:

<speed>,<name>,

<ce>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CBST=?

• +CBST: (list of supported

<speed>s,list of

supported <name>s, list

of supported <ce>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the

connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated.

Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup,

especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls.

Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.

<speed>

Description

Auto selection of baud rate

2400bps V.22bis

4800bps V.32

9600bps V.32

9600bps V.34

19200bps V.34

2400bps V.110 (ISDN)

4800bps V.110 (ISDN)

153

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<speed>

Description

9600bps V.110 (ISDN)

14400bps V.110 (ISDN)

19200bps V.110 (ISDN)

28800bps V.110 (ISDN)

38400bps V.110 (ISDN)

48000bps V.110 (ISDN)

56000bps V.110 (ISDN)

<name>

Description

Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1kHz modem)

<ce>

Description

Non transparent

154

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. DATA - CSD/HSCSD

5.2 AT+CRLP

Radio Link Protocol

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set radio link

protocol

AT+CRLP=[<iws>

[,<mws>[,<T1>

[,<N2>[,<ver>

[, <T4>]]]]]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the

current setting

AT+CRLP?

• +CRLP:

[,<T4>]][<CR><LF>

• +CRLP:

[,<T4>]][...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CRLP=?

• +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),

(list of supported <mws>s),

(list of supported <T1>s),

(list of supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>

[,(list of supported <T4>s)]]

[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of

supported <iws>s), (list of

supported <mws>s), (list of

supported <T1>s), (list of

supported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(list of

supported <T4>s)]][...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data

calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available

command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by

the device (e.g. <ver> may not be available if device supports only

versions 0 and 1).

Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version

<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx>

are returned.

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value. If ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLP

parameter value ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.

<iws>

Description

120

0 - 496

IWF to MS window size

<mws>

Description

120

0 - 496

MS to IWF window size

155

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<T1>

Description

38 - 100

Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms)

<N2>

Description

Re-transmission attempts N2

0 - 255

<T4>

Description

Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms)

3 - 255

<ver>

Description

Integer

RLP version. When version indication is not present,

<ver>=0 is assumed

Example

AT+CRLP?

+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0

+CRLP: 120,120,48,6,2,3

156

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Data - GPRS

6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Activate or deactivate

the specified PDP

context(s)

+CGACT=[<state>

[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

+CGACT?

• +CGACT: <cid>,

+CGACT: <cid>,

<state>[...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

+CGACT=?

• +CGACT: (list of

supported <state>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s).

After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command

state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored

and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR

or +CME: ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS

service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS

first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific

contexts.

If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates

all defined contexts.

If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command

deactivates all active contexts.

<state>

Description

PDP context activation deactivated

PDP context activation activated

<cid>

Description

Integer type

A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP

context definition

157

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Attach or detach MS

to the GPRS/packet

domain/packet

+CGATT=[<state>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

domain service

Show the current

setting

+CGATT?

• +CGATT: <state>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

+CGATT=?

• +CGATT: (list of

supported <state>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet

domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in

V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the

command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested

state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is

returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command)

are listed under “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”,

page 85.

Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the

attachment state changes to detached.

Note!

This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and

parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the

execution/set and test forms.

<state>

Description

Detached

Attached

158

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DATA - GPRS

6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Establish GPRS/packet

domain connection

+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid

[,cid>[,…]]]]

• CONNECT

• ERROR

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

+CGDATA=?

• +CGDATA: (list of

supported <L2P>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish

communication between the TE and the network using one or more

GPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing a

GPRS/packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.

<L2P>

Description

PPP

Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP

159

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Select PDP

context

parameters

+CGDCONT=[<cid>

[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>

[,<PDP_addr>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

[,<d_comp>

[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>

[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]

Show the

current setting

+CGDCONT?

• +CGDCONT: <cid>,

<PDP_type>,<APN>,

<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,

<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]

[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:

<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,

<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,

<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]

[...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

+CGDCONT=?

• +CGDCONT: (range of

supported <cid>s),

<PDP_type>,,,(list of

supported <d_comp>s),

(list of supported <h_comp>s)

[,(list of supported <pd1>s)

[,…[,(list of supported

<pdN>s)]]]

[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:

(range of supported <cid>s),

<PDP_type>,,,(list of

supported <d_comp>s),

(list of supported <h_comp>s)

[,(list of supported

<pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported

<pdN>s)]]] [...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by

the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>.

<cid>

Description

Integer type

(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which

specifies a particular PDP context definition. The

parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in

other PDP context-related commands. The range of

permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the

test form of the command

1-10

Supported values. Ericsson specific

<PDP_type>

Description

Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

160

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DATA - GPRS

<APN>

Description

String type

(Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical

name that is used to select the GGSN or the external

packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then

the subscription value will be requested

<PDP_address>

Description

String type

A string parameter that identifies the MS in the

address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is

null or omitted, then a value may be provided by

the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing

that, a dynamic address will be requested

<d_comp>

Description

PDP data compression OFF

PDP data compression ON

Reserved

2..255

<h_comp>

Description

PDP header compression OFF

PDP header compression ON

Reserved

2..255

<pdN>

Description

String type

Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific

to the <PDP_type>

161

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set command

+CGEREP=[<mode>

[,<bfr>]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

+CGEREP?

• +CGEREP:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

+CGEREP=?

• +CGEREP: (list of

supported

<mode>s),(list of

supported <bfr>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:

XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the

GPRS/packet domain MS or the network.

<mode>

Description

Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes are

forwarded to the TE

Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link is

reserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE

<bfr>

Description

MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this

command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered

162

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DATA - GPRS

6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Show PDP addresses

for specified CIDs

+CGPADDR=[<cid>

[,<cid> [,…]]]

• +CGPADDR:

[<CR><LF>+CGPAD

DR:

[...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

+CGPADDR=?

• +CGPADDR: (list of

defined <cid>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The

test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.

<cid>

Description

Integer type

Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context

definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is

specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are

returned

<PDP_address>

Description

String type

A string that identifies the MS in the address space

applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or

dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by

the +CGDCONT command when the context was

defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one

assigned during the last PDP context activation that

used the context definition referred to by <cid>.

<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available

163

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set minimum

acceptable

profile

+CGQMIN=[<cid>

[,<precedence>

[,<delay> [,<reliability>

[,<peak>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

[,<mean>]]]]]]

Show the

current

setting

+CGQMIN?

• +CGQMIN: <cid>,

<precedence>, <delay>,

<reliability>, <peak>,

<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:

<cid>, <precedence>,

<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,

<mean>[…]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

+CGQMIN=?

• +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of

supported <precedence>s),

(list of supported <delay>s),

(list of supported <reliability>s)

, (list of supported <peak>s),

(list of supported

<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMI

N: <PDP_type>, (list of

supported <precedence>s),

(list of supported <delay>s),

(list of supported <reliability>s)

, (list of supported <peak>s),

(list of supported

<mean>s)[…]]

• OK

• ERROR

Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is

checked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the

Activate PDP Context Accept message.

The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the

(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same

parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN

command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.

The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may

be set to a separate value.

A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN=<cid> causes the

minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become

undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.

<cid>

Description

Integer type

Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context

definition

164

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DATA - GPRS

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

High priority

Normal priority

Low priority

<delay>

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Delay class

1-4

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Reliability class

1-5

<peak>

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)

Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)

Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)

Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)

Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)

Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)

Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)

Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)

Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)

<mean>

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Best effort

100 (~0.22bits/s)

200 (~0.44bits/s)

500 (~1.11bits/s)

1000 (~2.2bits/s)

2000 (~4.4bits/s)

5000 (~11.1bits/s)

165

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<mean>

Description

10000 (~22bits/s)

20000 (~44bits/s)

50000 (~111bits/s)

100000 (~0.22kbits/s)

200000 (~0.44kbits/s)

500000 (~1.11kbits/s)

1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)

2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)

5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)

10000000 (~22kbits/s)

20000000 (~44kbits/s)

50000000 (~111kbits/s)

6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set quality

of service

profile

+CGQREQ=[<cid>

[,<precedence>

[,<delay>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

[,<reliability>

[,<peak>

[,<mean>]]]]]]

Show the

current

setting

+CGQREQ?

• +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,

<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,

<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:

<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,

<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command

is supported

+CGQREQ=?

• +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,

(list of supported <precedence>s),

(list of supported <delay>s),

(list of supported <reliability>s),

(list of supported <peak>s),

(list of supported <mean>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,

(list of supported <precedence>s),

(list of supported <delay>s),

(list of supported <reliability>s),

(list of supported <peak>s),

(list of supported <mean>s)[…]]

• OK

• ERROR

Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when

the MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network.

166

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DATA - GPRS

The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the

(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same

parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ

command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.

The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may

be set to a separate value.

A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the

requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.

<cid>

Description

Integer type

Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context

definition

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

High priority

Normal priority

Low priority

<delay>

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Delay class

1-4

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Reliability class

1-5

<peak>

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)

Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)

Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)

Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)

Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)

Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)

Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)

Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)

Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)

167

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<mean>

Description

Subscribed (from network) value used

Best effort

100 (~0.22bits/s)

200 (~0.44bits/s)

500 (~1.11bits/s)

1000 (~2.2bits/s)

2000 (~4.4bits/s)

5000 (~11.1bits/s)

10000 (~22bits/s)

20000 (~44bits/s)

50000 (~111bits/s)

100000 (~0.22kbits/s)

200000 (~0.44kbits/s)

500000 (~1.11kbits/s)

1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)

2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)

5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)

10000000 (~22kbits/s)

20000000 (~44kbits/s)

50000000 (~111kbits/s)

168

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. DATA - GPRS

6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set command

AT+CGREG=[<n>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CGREG?

• +CGREG:

<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,

<ci>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CGREG=?

• +CGREG: (list of

supported <n>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>

when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network

registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.

Note!

If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the

+CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration

status and location information for those services.

<n>

Description

Disable network registration unsolicited result code

Enable network registration unsolicited result code

Enable network registration and location information

unsolicited result code

<stat>

Description

Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to

Registered, home network

Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to

Registration denied

Unknown

Registered, roaming

<lac>

Description

String type

Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

169

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<ci>

String type

Description

Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

Example

AT+CGREG?

+CGREG: 0,3

6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set service or service

preference

+CGSMS=[<service>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

+CGSMS?

• +CGSMS: <service>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

+CGSMS=?

• +CGSMS: (list of

available

<service>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to

send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently

selected service or service preference.

Description

GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if

GPRS/packet domain not available)

Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if

circuit switched not available)

170

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Data - HSCSD

7.1 AT+CHSC

HSCSD Current Call Parameters

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Show the current

setting

AT+CHSC

• +CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CHSC=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. the

current number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rate

and channel coding.

<rx>

Description

No HSCSD call is active. See also note below

The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1

The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2

<tx>

Description

No HSCSD call is active. See also note below

The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1

<aiur>

Description

No HSCSD call is active. See also note below.

Current air interface user rate is 9.6kbits/s

Current air interface user rate is 19.2kbits/s

Description

No HSCSD call is active. See also note

Current channel coding is 9.6kbits/s (TCH/F9.6)

Current channel coding is 14.4kbits/s (TCH/F14.4)

171

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

7.2 AT+CHSD

HSCSD Device Parameters

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Show the current

setting

AT+CHSD

• +CHSD:

<mclass>,<maxRx>,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CHSD=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.

Description

Multislot class is 2

<maxRx>

Description

Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2

<maxTx>

Description

Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use is 1

<sum>

Description

Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME

can use at the same time is 3 (i.e. 2+1). The following

applies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit slots)

<sum>

Description

Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next

established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbits/s only

172

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. DATA - HSCSD

7.3 AT+CHSN

HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set HSCSD

AT+CHSN=[<wAiur>

[,<wRx>[,<topRx>

[,<codings>]]]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

configuration. This

command is also used

during a call if new

are/is desired

Show the current

setting

AT+CHSN?

• +CHSN: <wAiur>,

<wRx>, <topRx>,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CHSN=?

• +CHSN: (list of

supported <wAiur>s),

(list of supported

<wRx>s), (list of

supported <topRx>s),

(list of supported

<codings>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Controls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing

<topRx> or <codings> during a call does not affect the current call.

Changing <wAiur> or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx>

was non-zero when the call was established. When using the command

in this way it comes in the “action” command category. This is what is

referred to as user initiated up- and down-grading in GSM 02.34 and

GSM 03.34.

Note!

Recommended value for parameter <speed> in AT+CBST is 0.

<wAiur>

Description

TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive

timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate

(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, and

<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSD

command if <wRx>=0)

Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6kbit/s

Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4kbit/s

Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2kbit/s

Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8kbit/s

173

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<wRx>

Description

TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive

timeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and <codings>

See note below

Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1

Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2

<topRx>

Description

Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>

and /or <wRx> during the next call

Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during

the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 1

Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during

the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 2

Description

Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next

established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbit/s only

7.4 AT+CHSR

HSCSD Parameters Report

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set HSCSD parameters

reporting on or off

AT+CHSR=[<mode>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CHSR?

• +CHSR: <mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CHSR=?

• +CHSR: (list of

supported

<modes>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

With this command enabled, the intermediate result code +CHSR:

<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding> is returned (from TA to TE) when an

HSCSD call is being set up. The result code represents the current

(negotiated or renegotiated) HSCSD parameters. If enabled, the

intermediate result code is transmitted at the point of the call setup

negotiation, where the ME/TA has determined what type of HSCSD

connection will be used. Result code transmission is done after possible

service (CR), error control (+ER), and/or compression (+DR) reporting,

174

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. DATA - HSCSD

but before possible TE-TA rate (+ILRR) reporting and before the

intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted. The format of the

intermediate result code is:

+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>

For the value definitions, refer to “AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call

Parameters”, page 171. For instance, for a non-transparent HSCSD call,

result code ‘CHSR: 2, 1, 4, 8’ means that the call has two timeslots

downlink, one timeslot uplink, the air interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s

and the used channel coding is

TCH/F14.4.

<mode>

Description

Disable reporting

Enable reporting

Itermediate Result Codes:

+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>

7.5 AT+CHSU

HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set HSCSD automatic

user initiated

upgrading on or off

AT+CHSU=[<mode>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CHSU?

• +CHSU=<mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CHSU=?

• +CHSU: (list of

supported

<modes>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.

<mode>

Description

Disable use of UP bit for upgrading. Default value

Enable use of UP bit for upgrading

175

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

176

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. GPS Interoperability

8.1 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Enable NMEA

commands on the

UART

AT*EENMEA=<mode>

• OK

• ERROR

• +CME ERROR: < err>

Show the current

setting

AT*EENMEA?

AT*EENMEA=?

• *EENMEA:<mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Shows if the command

is supported

• *EENMEA: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• +CME ERROR: < err>

This command enables transmission of NMEA commands from

UART1 to UART2 and vice versa. The module acts as a transparent link

between the GPS device connected to UART2 and the application

communicating with it on UART1.

When the application sends the command AT*EENMEA=2 the module

is able to handle both AT and NMEA commands simultaneously. If the

OK response is received the application can start handling both NMEA

and AT commands. Otherwise the response ERROR is returned.

In the mode with simultaneous AT and NMEA commands, <CR> is

required after each NMEA command and after the last AT command

before the new NMEA. NMEA commands must start with a $. All

NMEA commands are forwarded to UART2. All NMEA responses

from UART2 are displayed as responses to UART1 along with AT

responses.

By sending AT*EENMEA=0, the application ends AT and NMEA

commands, simultaneous handling mode. It sends OK, and then returns

to AT mode.

The port rate of UART1 for NMEA commands can be controlled using

the AT*NMPR command.

Responses

Description

The requested action has been performed

ERROR

Following causes of error are considered:

- incorrect syntax

- NMEA commands have already been enabled in other

07.10 channels

177

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<mode>

Description

Disable NMEA communication. Default value

Enable NMEA communication simultaneously with AT

commands

8.2 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request operation to

set data rate for GPS/

NMEA Port

AT*E2NMPR=<pr>

• ERROR

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT*E2NMPR?

AT*E2NMPR=?

*E2NMPR: <pr>

Show if the command

is supported

• *E2NMPR: (list of

supported <pr>s)

• ERROR

This command allows the user to set the physical Data rate for the GPS/

NMEA port. The port rate will be set for the GPS/NMEA port only

when NMEA is active - see AT*EENMEA.

<op>

Description

600 Baud rate

1200 Baud rate

2400 Baud rate

4800 Baud rate

9600 Baud rate. Default value

19200 Baud rate

38400 Baud rate

57600 Baud rate

115200 Baud rate

230400 Baud rate

460800 Baud rate

Examples

AT*E2NMPR=?

*E2NMPR=(0-10)

Port rate currently set:

178

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. GPS INTEROPERABILITY

AT*E2NMPR?

*E2NMPR: 4

Set GPS/NMEA port rate to 4800 baud:

AT*E2NMPR=2

179

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

180

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Fax

9.1 AT*E2FAX

Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request change of fax

comm. baud rate

AT*E2FAX= <RcV>

• ERROR

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT*E2FAX?

• *E2FAX: <RcV>

• ERROR

Shows if the command

is supported

AT*E2FAX=?

• *E2FAX: (list of

supported <RcV>s)

• ERROR

This command allows the modification of the factory default RS232

comm. setting between standard 9600 baud and 19200 baud. This is

needed as the addition of fax capabilities, within the module, require

communication between fax applications and the module to run at a

higher baud rate than the fax transmission baud rate (In this case the

fastest transmission rate is 9600 baud). Once this command has been

performed, the user must then execute the AT&F command to reset the

module with the new RS232 comm's baud rate.

The AT*E2FAX command allows the user to:

• “Configure” the RS232 Comm. speed default factory profile,

specifying whether the speed should be 9600 baud (standard) or

19200 baud for FAX application comm. This value will then be used

once the AT&F command is next used.

• “Read” what value this default factory profile has been set to.

<RcV>

Description

Configure RS232 default setting to 9600 baud

Configure RS232 default setting to 19200 baud

Examples

AT*E2FAX=?

*E2FAX= (0-1)

181

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

AT*E2FAX?

*E2FAX: 0

(Current default setting is 19200 baud)

(Sets default RS232 setting to 9600 baud)

AT*E2FAX=0

9.2 Low Level Fax Commands

The following table of low level fax commands are supported and used

by the GM47 for fax operation.

AT+FAA

AT+FBADLIN

AT+FBUG

AT+FCQ

AT+FDFFC

AT+FDT

AT+FBADMUL

AT+FCIG

AT+FCR

AT+FBOR

AT+FCLASS

AT+FDCC

AT+FDR

AT+FDIS

AT+FECM

AT+FLID

AT+FET

AT+FK

AT+FLNFC

AT+FMFR?

AT+FMM?

AT+FPTS

AT+FLPL

AT+FMI?

AT+FMR?

AT+FRBC

AT+FRH

AT+FMDL?

AT+FMINSP

AT+FPHCTO

AT+FREL

AT+FREV?

AT+FRS

AT+FRM

AT+FSPL

AT+FTM

AT+FTBC

AT+FTS

AT+FTH

AT+FVRFC

AT+FWDFC

182

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. Identification

10.1 AT

Attention Command

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Checks the communication

between the MS and

application

• OK

• +CME ERROR <err>

This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS

supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.

10.2 AT&F

Set to Factory Defined Configuration

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Execute

AT&F

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT&F=?

&F: (list of supported

<profile>s)

This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values

specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration

hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.

10.3 AT&W

Store User Profile

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Stores the current user

profile to non volatile

memory

AT&W=[<pr>] or

AT&W[<pr>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT&W=?

&W: (list of supported

<pr>s)

This command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.

< pr>

Description

Stores current settings in User Profile 0

183

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

10.4 AT*

List all Supported AT Commands

Description

Command

Possible Responses

List all implemented AT

commands

AT*

[<CR> <LF>

<AT Command2>[…]]

[<CR> <LF>

<AT Command2>[…]]

Lists all the commands supported by the MS.

10.5 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request manufacturer

identification

AT+CGMI

• <manufacturer>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CGMI=?

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text.

Description

Sony Ericsson

This company’s name is displayed

Example

AT+CGMI

Sony Ericsson

10.6 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request the model

identification

AT+CGMM

• <model type>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CGMM=?

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>,

determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user of

the ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is

184

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. IDENTIFICATION

connected. Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the

name of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide more

information if desired.

Description

String type

A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10

characters long. Spaces are used when the number of

characters/digits is less than 10

Description

String type

Model name for the transceiver unit, for example, GM47

Example

AT+CGMM

6100501-BVGM47

10.7 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request MS revision

identification string

AT+CGMR

• <revision>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CGMR=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command causes the MS to return a string containing information

about the software version.

Description

String type

An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour,

minute) plus KRC number.

Example: 9710051610 CXC125112

185

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

10.8 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request product serial

number

AT+CGSN

• <sn>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CGSN=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobile

station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.

<sn>

Description

String

The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile station

Equipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03) number of the ME and the

software version number. Text shall not contain the sequence

0<CR> or OK<CR>

10.9 AT+GMI

Read Manufacturer Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request manufacturer

identification

AT+GMI

Show if the command

is supported

AT+GMI=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of

information text. Typically, the text will consist of a single line

containing the name of the manufacturer, but may provide more

information such as address and telephone number for customer

service.

Description

string type

The total number of characters, including line

terminators, in the information text returned in response

to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters.

Note that the information text shall not contain the

sequence “0” or “OK”, so that DTE can avoid false

detection of the end of this information text

186

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. IDENTIFICATION

10.10 AT+GMM Read Model Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request revision

identification

AT+GMM

<model>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+GMM=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of

information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to

permit the user of the DCE to identify the specific model of device.

Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the name of

the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide any information

desired.

<model>

Description

string type

The total number of characters, including line terminators,

in the information text returned in response to this

command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that

the information text shall not contain the sequence “0 ” or

“OK”, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of

this information text

10.11 AT+GMR Read Revision Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request revision

identification

AT+GMR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+GMR=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command returns a manufacturer specified software revision name

in a text string.

Description

string type

The total number of characters, including line terminators,

in the information text returned in response to this

command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that

the information text shall not contain the sequence “0” or

“OK”, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of

this information text.

Example

AT+GMR

R2A009prgCXC1122112

187

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

10.12 ATI

Identification Information

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Execute

ATI[<value>]

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text,

followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to

select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown

in the table below.

This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.

<value>

Description

Same information as +GMM command (model

identification)

Same information as +GMR command (revision

identification)

Modem model description

Active settings

Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modem

functionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type,

etc.)

DCE hardware type version

PnP (plug and play) information

Examples

ATI=1

CXC1122112

ATI=5

Configuration Settings on Channel 0

&C: 1

&D: 0

*EENMEA: 0

+CGACT: 1,0

+CGATT: 0

+CGDCONT: 1,“IP”,“internet”,“”,0,0

+CGEREP: 0,0

+CGREG: 0,3

+CHSR: 0

+CHSU: 0

+CMEE: 1

+CMUX: 0,0,1,31,10,3,30,10,2

+CR: 0

188

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. IDENTIFICATION

+CRC: 0

+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0

+CRLP: 120,120,48,6,2,3

+CVHU: 2

+ICF: 3,3

+IFC: 2,2

+ILRR: 0

+IPR: 115200

E: 1

M: 0

Q: 0

S0: 000

S10: 002

S2: 043

S3: 013

S4: 010

S5: 008

S6: 002

S7: 050

S8: 002

V: 1

X: 4

189

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

190

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. Input/Output

11.1 AT*E2IO

Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request operation

with the I/O signals

AT*E2IO=<op>,<io>

[,<val>][,<adc_val>]

• ERROR

• OK

• *E2IO: <op>,<io>[,[<val>]

[,<adc_val>]]

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2IO=?

• *E2IO: (list of supported

<op>s), <io>s,(list of

supported <val>s),(list of

supported <adc_val>s)

• ERROR

Description:

The module has 8 digital I/Os; 4 configurable GPIOs, 1 input-only, and

3 output-only.

The module also has 3 ADCs, and 1 DAC. All of these signals are

controlled by the AT*E2IO command.

Note!

IO1 to IO4 are set to INPUT as a factory default. Their status (Input/

Output) is stored in non-volatile memory.

Set command controls the operations with the I/O signals for the M2M

devices. It is possible to perform up to 5 operations. These operations

have the following meaning:

• Read (<op> = 0): It reads the state of the specified signal. It returns

the binary state of digital signals or value (0-255) of an ADC input

or the DAC output. In case of a digital I/O the command has the

following syntax:

AT*E2IO=0,“IO1”

*E2IO: 0,“IO1”,0

If reading from the ADC/DACs:

AT*E2IO=0,“AD1”

*E2IO: 0,“AD1”,,62

191

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

• Write (<op> = 1): Sets an output to a specific value. For digital

sources <val>=‘0’ or ‘1’ and for the analog ones, 0-255. If the signal

is bi-directional (IO1 to IO4) it must be configured as an output

before writing is allowed. If the output can be written to, the signal is

set to <val> and OK is returned, otherwise ERROR is returned.

AT*E2IO=1,“IO1”,1

AT*E2IO=1,“DA1”,,100

• Configure (<op> = 2): The configuration operation is used for the

bi-directional signals (IO1 to IO4). They can be configured as input,

<val>= ‘0’ or output, <val>=‘1’. If the signal is not configurable,

ERROR is returned in place of OK. Once set, the signal remains

configured even after a power cycle. Example shown below:

AT*E2IO=2,“IO1”,1 (Set IO1 as an output)

• Configure Check (<op> = 3): This operation reads the current

configuration of the signal. Returned <val> is current signal state. If

the signal is configurable, the current state and OK are returned, if

not ERROR is returned.

AT*E2IO=3,“IO1”

*E2IO: 3,“IO1”,1

(IO1 is currently set as an output)

• Trigger (<op> = 4): Input signals can be set to send an unsolicited

result code whenever a change in one of the inputs has been

produced. Setting a trigger (<val> = ‘1’) will cause the unsolicited

result to be sent when a change from the current signal state occurs

(signal must be unchanging when command is executed). Clearing a

trigger (<val> = ‘0’) will clear a currently set trigger. Configurable

signals (IO1 to IO4) must be set as inputs before they can be

triggered. Triggers are only applicable while the module is ON.

Power-cycling will clear all current triggers. If a signal is triggerable

OK is returned and the trigger is set/cleared, otherwise ERROR is

returned.

AT*E2IO=4,“I5”,1

(Set trigger on I5)

(I5 changes state, sometime later)

192

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. INPUT/OUTPUT

*E2IO: 3,“I5”,1

(I5 triggered, current state ‘1’)

• Trigger Check (<op> = 5): Checks if a signal input is configured as

a trigger. Returned <val> shows the current trigger state; ‘1’ for

triggered or ‘0’ for not triggered. If the signal is triggerable, the

current trigger status and OK are return, otherwise ERROR is

returned.

AT*E2IO=5,“I5”

*E2IO: 5,“I5”,1

(I5 is currently set to trigger)

The test command returns the supported I/Os and allowed value ranges.

Abortability:

This command may not be aborted.

<op>

Description

Read

Write

Configure

Configure Check

Trigger

Trigger Check

<io>

Description

“IO1”

“IO2”

“IO3”

“IO4”

“I5”

Digital Input 1. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5

Digital Input 2. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5

Digital Input 3. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5

Digital Input 4. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5

Digital Input 5. Supported Operations: 0,4,5

“O5”

“O6”

“O7”

“DA1”

“AD1”

“AD2”

“AD3”

Digital Output 5. Supported Operations: 0,1

Digital Output 6. Supported Operations: 0,1

Digital Output 7. Supported Operations: 0,1

Digital/Analogue Input: Supported Operations: 0,1

Analogue/Digital Output 1: Supported Operations: 0

Analogue/Digital Output 2: Supported Operations: 0

Analogue/Digital Output 3: Supported Operations: 0

193

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<val>

Description

Configure

Read/Write

Trigger

The logic value is

FALSE

I/O signal is INPUT

I/O signal is NOT set

to trigger

Logic value is TRUE

I/O signal is OUTPUT

I/O signal is set to

trigger

<adc_val>

Description

0-255

The decimal value shall represent the analogue voltage it

is hold on the I/O. Applicable only to A/D or D/A signals.

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*E2IO: <source>, <io>, <val>

Scenario Cases

Reading an I/O:

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=0,“I1”

The TE is requesting for the

logic value of I1 (Digital Input

*E2IO:0,“I1”,1

The MS responds I1 has a TRUE

logic value

AT*E2IO=0,“AD1”

The TE is requesting for the

reading of AD1 value

(Analogue Input 1)

*E2IO:0,“AD1”, ,87

The MS responds AD1 has a

decimal value of 87. In volts:

((2.75*0.9)/256)*87 = 0.841V

Writing in an Output:

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=1,“O1”,1

The TE is requesting to write a

TRUE logic to O1 (Digital

Output 1)

The MS responds OK because

the operation has been

performed

AT*E2IO=1,“I3”,0

The TE is requesting to write a

FALSE logic value to I3 (Digital

Input 3)

ERROR

The MS responds ERROR

because the operation is not

possible

194

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. INPUT/OUTPUT

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=1,“DA1”,95

The TE is writing 95 decimal

value to hold a voltage of:

((2.75*0.9)/256)*95 = 0.918V

The MS responds OK because

the operation has been

performed

Configuring an I/O:

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=2,“I1”,0

AT*E2IO=2,“O1”,0

The TE is requesting to

configure IO1 as an input

The MS responds OK because

the operation has been

performed

AT*E2IO=2,“I4”,1

AT*E2IO=2,“O4”,1

The TE is requesting to

configure IO4 as an output

The MS responds OK because

the operation has been

performed

Checking an I/O status:

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=3,“I1”

AT*E2IO=3,“O1”

The TE is requesting to check

the configuration of the IO1

signal

*E2IO:3,“I1”,0

The MS responds IO1 is

configured as an input

*E2IO:3,“O1”,0

AT*E2IO=3,“I4”

AT*E2IO=3,“O4”

The TE is requesting to check

the configuration of the IO4

signal

*E2IO:3,“I4”,1

The MS responds IO4 is

configured as an output

*E2IO:3,“O4”,1

195

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Triggering an Input:

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=4,“I1”,1

The TE is requesting to trigger

Input 1

The MS responds OK because

the operation has been

performed

AT*E2IO=4,“I4”,0

The TE is requesting to not

trigger Input 4

The MS responds OK because

the operation has been

performed

*E2IO:4,“I1”,1

An event has occurred. The

input 1 has triggered on

changing the input to logic

value 1

Checking an Input Trigger:

AT Command

Response

Comment

AT*E2IO=5,“I1”

The TE is requesting the trigger

state of the Input 1

*E2IO=5,“I1”,1

The MS responds that I1 has its

trigger active

196

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. Interface

12.1 AT+CPIN

PIN Control

See 3.26, AT+CPIN PIN Control

12.2 AT&C

Circuit 109 (DCD) Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set behavior of carrier

detect

AT&C[<value>]

ERROR

Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.

<value>

Description

DCD always on

DCD follows the connection. Default value

12.3 AT&D

Circuit 108 (DTR) Response

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Control actions from

DTE

AT&D[<value>]

ERROR

Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.

<value>

Description

Ignore. Default value

When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line command

mode. For all other states, see <value>=2

Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode

12.4 AT&S

Circuit 107 (DSR) Response

This command is not availalbe in software releases up to and including

R2A.

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set behaviour of data

set ready

AT&S[<value>]

• OK

• ERROR

197

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Determines the behaviour of the data set ready signal.

<value>

Description

DSR always on

DSR on in data mode. DSR off in command mode. Default

value

12.5 AT+WS46

Mode Selection

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the cellular

protocol mode

AT+WS46=n

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+WS46?

• <n> OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+WS46=?

• (list of supported <n>s) OK

• ERROR

Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of

the phone.

<n> parameter

Description

This value is used for GSM at 900 Mhz., DCS-1800, and

PCS-1900 phones

12.6 ATE

Command Echo

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request Command

Echo

ATE[<value>]

ATE=[<value>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATE?

<value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATE=?

E: (list of supported

<value>s)

The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes

characters received from the DTE during command state and online

command state.

<value>

Description

DCE does not echo characters during command state and

online command state

DCE echoes characters during command state and online

command state. Default value

198

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. INTERFACE

12.7 ATV

DCE Response Format

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set DCE response

format

ATV[=]<value>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

ATV?

V: <value>

Show if the command

is supported

ATV=?

V: (list of supported

<value>s)

Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV

command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the

<S3><S4> additions to the command response.

<value>

Description

Display numeric result codes

Display verbose result codes. Default value

List of result codes

ATV1/ATV=1

ATV0/ATV=0

Description

Acknowledges execution of a

command

CONNECT

A connection has been established;

the DCE is moving from command

state to online data state

RING

The DCE has detected an incoming

call signal from the network

NO CARRIER

The connection has been terminated

or the attempt to establish a

connection failed

ERROR

Command not recognized, command

line maximum length exceeded,

parameter value invalid, or other

problem with processing the command

line

NO DIALTONE

BUSY

No dial tone detected

Engaged (busy) signal detected

NO ANSWER

“@” (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial

modifier was used, but remote ringing

followed by five seconds of silence was

not detected before expiration of the

connection timer

CONNECT

<TEXT>

Manufacturer

-specific

Same as CONNECT, but includes

manufacturer-specific text that may

specify DTE speed, line speed, error

control, data compression, or other

status

199

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

12.8 ATZ

Reset to Default Configuration

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Execute

ATZ

• OK

• ERROR

Execute

ATZ=<profile>

ATZ=?

• OK

• ERROR

Show if supported and

list available

parameter range

Z: (list of supported

<profile>s)

This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default

values as specified by the user. Consider hardware configuration

switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using

this command.

Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will

be ignored.

Description

Select the user profile to restore

12.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Switch to 07.10

AT+CMUX=<transpa

rency>[,<subset>[,

<port_speed>[,<N1>

[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>

[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]

+CME ERROR: <err>

Show the current

setting

AT+CMUX?

• +CMUX:<transparency>,

,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>[,<k>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMUX=?

• +CMUX: (list of supported

<transparency>s),

(list of supported <subset>s),

(list of supported

<port_speed>s),

(list of supported <N1>s),

(list of supported <T1>s),

(list of supported <N2>s),

(list of supported <T2>s),

(list of supported <T3>s),

(list of supported <k>)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

The command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only “no transparency

is supported”. The parameter <k> is not used.

200

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. INTERFACE

The default values for the parameters below are for “no transparency”

and “only UIH frames used”.

Description

No transparency

Description

Only UIH frames used

<port_speed>

Description

9600bits/s

19200bits/s

38400bits/s

57600bits/s

115200bits/s

230400bits/s

460800bits/s

<N1>

Description

Default maximum frame size

<T1>

Description

100ms default timer

<N2>

Description

Default maximum number of re-transmissions

<T2>

Description

300ms default timer

<T3>

Description

10s default timer

<k>

Description

1..7

Window size

201

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

12.10 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Restore settings

AT+CRES[=<profile>]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CRES=?

• +CRES: (list of

supported

<profile>s)

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active

memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings

specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message

Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

(if implemented) are restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMS

parameters, cannot be restored.

Description

0..2

Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default

value is 0

12.11 AT+ICF

Cable Interface Character Format

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Defines DTE-DCE

character framing

AT+ICF=[format[,parity]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+ICF?

• +ICF:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+ICF=?

• +ICF: (list of

supported

<format>s), (list of

supported <parity>s)

• OK

• ERROR

This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the

local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the

DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text

and result code, if this is not automatically determined; (Not

supported) +IPR=0 forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).

Description

8 Data 1 Stop. Default value

202

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. INTERFACE

Description

Space. Default value

Example

AT+ICF?

+ICF: 3,3

12.12 AT+IFC

DTE-DCE Local Flow Control

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Defines DTE-DCE local

flow control

AT+IFC=[<by_te>,

[<by_ta>]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+IFC?

+IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+IFC=?

+IFC: (list of supported

<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)

Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in

on-line data mode.

No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.

<by_te>

Description

No flow control on DTE

Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are

removed by the DCE interface

RTS flow control on DCE. Default value

Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are

passed to the remote DCE/DTE

<by_ta>

Description

No flow control on DCE

Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE

CTS flow control on DCE. Default value

203

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

12.13 AT+ILRR

Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Defines DTE-DCE

character framing

AT+ILRR=<value>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+ILRR?

+ILRR:<value>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+ILRR=?

+ILRR:(list of supported

<values>s)

Specifies whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>”

information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate>

reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-

DCE rate. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted after

any modulation, error control or data compression reports are

transmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is

transmitted. The <rate> is applied after the final result code is

transmitted.

<value>

Description

Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not

transmitted). Default value

Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted)

12.14 AT+IPR

Cable Interface Port Command

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Defines fixed DTE rate

AT+IPR=[rate]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+IPR?

• +IPR:<rate>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+IPR=?

• +IPR: (), (list of fixed-

only <rate>s)]

• OK

• ERROR

Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in

addition to 1200bits/s or 9600bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause

4.3). It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, which

the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting.

204

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. INTERFACE

The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result

code(s) associated with the current command line.

<rate>

Description

Discrete

integer value

The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per

second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate,

e.g. “19200” or “115200”. The rates supported by a

particular DCE are manufacturer specific.

The following rates, are supported;

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200

230400

460800

12.15 AT*E2SPI Serial Peripheral Interface

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Serial Peripheral

interface

AT*E2SPI=<op>

[,<byteformat>

[,<InitSync>]]

[,<byte1>,<byte2>,...,

<byte n>]

• ERROR

• OK

• *E2SPI:

<byte1rx>,<byte2rx>,...,

Show the current

setting

AT*E2SPI?

• *E2SPI: <active>,

Shows if the

command is

supported

AT*E2SPI=?

• *E2SPI: (list of supported

<op>s,list of supported

<byteformat>s, list of

supported <InitSync>s)

• ERROR

This command allows the user to send data via an SPI bus. The SPI bus

is made up from the IO pins (IO1 = Clock, IO2 = Data In, IO3 = Data

Out, and O6/ RI = Sync (optional)).

The bus works with the GM47 being the SPI master. The clock is

generated by the GM47, and on each clock cycle, data is both

transmitted on the Data Out pin, and received on the Data in pin. The

Sync pin (optional) can be used as a chipselect pin for latching the data

after a number of bytes have been sent. The initial state of the Sync pin

can be set, so it is toggled from that state.

Once the SPI bus is enabled, the IOs that are used can not be used for

any other purpose until the SPI is disabled. This means the AT*E2IO

command cannot modify these pins, and if the Sync pin is activated, RI

will not be output.

Three operations can be made on the SPI bus:

205

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

SPI Enable (<op> = 255)

This command is entered to set up the SPI bus, and to enable the

relevant signals. The byte format is defined here (the number of bytes

output between toggling the Sync pin high and low). The Initial state of

the Sync pin is also defined. If the byte format is set to zero (0), then the

Sync pin is not used, and is not controlled by the SPI.

Example:

AT*E2SPI=255,2,1<CR>

This command sets the SPI bus active, and the Sync pin is made toggle

every 2 bytes of output data. The initial state of the Sync pin is HIGH.

SPI Send/Receive (<op> = 1-32)

This command sends from 1 - 32 bytes of data across the enabled SPI

bus. Data is sent MSB first, from the first byte to the last byte.

Example:

AT*E2SPI=8,170,170,85,85,170,170,85,85<CR>

This command sends 8 bytes (170,170,85,85,170,170,85,85) across the

SPI bus. Bytes are in decimal format.

SPI Disable (<op>= 0)

This command is sent to disable the SPI functionality, and restore use

of IO pins to other applications. The SPI bus must be disabled before

being enabled with a new set of parameters.

AT*E2SPI=0

<op>

Description

Disable SPI bus

1-32

255

Send/ receive 1-32 bytes

Enable SPI bus

Description

No Sync Pin function

1-32

Sync is toggled every 1-32 bytes sent/received

206

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. INTERFACE

Description

Sync Pin initial state LOW

Sync Pin initial state HIGH

<byte x>,

Description

0-255

decimal value denoting the byte value to be sent

Description

SPI bus is active (pins are controlled by SPI)

SPI bus is not active (pins are not controlled by SPI)

12.16 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time

Description

Command

Possible responses

Set GPRS online

command guard time

AT*E2ESC=[<gt>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*E2ESC?

*E2ESC: <gt>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2ESC=?

• OK

• ERROR

Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-

line command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of the

data stream or a terminating string from the application and no further

data is received for the duration of the guard time the module will go

into on line command mode. This guards against the module

accidentally going into on line command mode. The verbose format of

+++AT<CR> is <S2><S2><S2>AT<S3>.

<gt>

Description

No guard time. Default value

1-10

Guard time in seconds

207

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

208

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. Network

13.1 AT*E2CD

Ericsson M2M Cell Description

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request network cell

description

AT*E2CD=<n>

• ERROR

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT*E2CD?

• *E2CD:

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2CD=?

• *E2CD: (list of

supported <n>s)

• ERROR

Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when

<n>=1, or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters,

E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>.

Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several

values, which show the network cell parameters.

Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when

<n>=1 and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME is

registered use the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered in

the cellular network an ERROR message is returned.

<n>

Description

Disable network location information unsolicited result

code. Default value

Enable network location information unsolicited result

code *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>

<lac>

Description

String type

Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci>

Description

string type

Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

209

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<ta>

Description

0-63

According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing

advance value is the binary representation of the timing

advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the

integer representation of the timing advance in binary

format

64-255

Reserved

210

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

13.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set the

AT*E2EMM= • ERROR

response

presentation

mode

<n>[,<m>]

• OK

Display mode

neighbour cells

are taken from

the toplist

*E2EMM:

Serving Cell

MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,

C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,T

N],

[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,

<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],

NeighBours Cells

MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,

C2],

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

…

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

Compact mode.

The first cell is the

serving cell, the

rest are

neighbour cells

taken from the

toplist

*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,

<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqsub>,

<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>,

<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,

…

Verbose mode.

The first cell is the

serving cell and

the rest are

*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,

<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]

[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,

<ta>,<tn>],

neighbour cells

as provided by

the network in

the system info.

messages (2 and

5) and via the

AT*E2NBTS

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

…

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

command

Reduced display

mode - info. as

display mode but

without text

*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,

<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]

[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,

<ta>,<tn>],

headings or

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

separators,

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

neighbour cells

from top list

…

<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]

Show the current

setting

AT*E2EMM? • *E2EMM: <n>

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2EMM= • *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list

of supported <m>s)

• ERROR

211

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

There are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose,

and Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response or

continuous unsolicited responses).

The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the

data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks

(<CR><LF>). This format is, however, not well suited for machine

decoding. The formats Verbose, Compact and Reduced Display do not

have headers or line breaks. Verbose mode displays more parameters

than the compact mode.

The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or

an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response.

Examples

AT*E2EMM=1

*E2EMM:

Serving Cell

MCC,MNC,LAC,CellId,BSIC,Ch,RxL,C1,C2

234,15,0016,0D91,2E,0081,-085,00019,00019

Neighbour Cells

MCC,MNC,LAC,CellId,BSIC,Ch,RxL,C1,C2

000,00,0016,4047,3A,0083,-103,00001,00001

000,00,0016,423C,3A,0065,-104,00000,00000

000,00,0016,2F21,21,0067,-104,00000,00000

000,00,0016,8E3D,34,0077,-104,00000,00000

000,00,0016,348A,10,0091,-104,00000,00000

AT*E2EMM=3

*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,

<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,

<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,

<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,

<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,

<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,

<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,

…

<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,

AT*E2EMM=5

*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,

<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,

<servcell C1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,

<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>],

212

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,

<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,

<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1 C2>],

<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,

<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,

<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],

…

<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,

<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,

<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcelln C2>]

AT*E2EMM=7

*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,

<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,

<servcell c1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,

<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],

<neighborcell1 mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,

<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,

<neighborcell1 rxl>[,< neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],

<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,

<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,

<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]

…

<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,

<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,

<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]

The mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed in

the table below.

When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n>=1, but

neighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the information

that comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTS

that are on the Serving Cell's surroundings.

<n>

Description

Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code.

Default value

One shot presentation of the network location

information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>

line separators

Enable network location information unsolicited result

code in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuous

unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart

One shot presentation of the compact network location

information

213

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<n>

Description

Enable compact network location information unsolicited

result code. There will be continuous unsolicited

information responses <m> seconds apart

One shot presentation of the network location information

(verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming from the

Serving Cell signalling information

As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited

information responses <m> seconds apart

One shot presentation of the network information (same

information as in n=1) but no headers or <CR><LF> line

separators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist

As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited

information responses <m> seconds apart

<m>

Description

1-255

Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited

responses. Default value is 5

<mcc>

Description

Integer type

Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code

identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU

<mnc>

Description

Integer type

Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code

identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell

<lac>

Description

Integer type

Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci>

Description

Integer type

Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

<bsic>

Description

Integer type

One byte Base Stations Identification code in

hexadecimal format

<ch>

Description

(0-1023)

It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF

Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier

214

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

<rxl>

Description

Integer type

Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle

mode

Description

Integer type

Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is

taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100

TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe

Description

Integer type

Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is

taken from the DownLink signal and the average is

applied to subset of SACCH frames

Description

BER < 0.1%

0.26% < BER < 0.30%

0.51% < BER < 0.64%

1.0% < BER < 1.3%

1.9% < BER < 2.7%

3.8% < BER < 5.4%

7.6% < BER < 11.0%

BER > 15.0%

<mcc>

Description

Integer type

Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code

identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU

<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received

signal on dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to a

subset of a SACCH multiframe.

Description

BER < 0.1%

0.26% < BER < 0.30%

0.51% < BER < 0.64%

1.0% < BER < 1.3%

215

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

1.9% < BER < 2.7%

3.8% < BER < 5.4%

7.6% < BER < 11.0%

BER > 15.0%

<c1>

Description

Integer

Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS

calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the

cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the

criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08

<c2>

Description

Integer

Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This

parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection

<ta>

Description

0-63

According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing

advance value is the binary representation of the timing

advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the

integer representation of the timing advance in binary

format

64-255

Reserved

<tn>

Description

0-7

Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel

216

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

13.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request service

provider indication

AT*E2SPN

• *E2SPN: <spi>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2SPN=?

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM

card (<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes

containing the service provider name stored in the EF

file in the SIM

SPN

card (see GSM 11.11). ERROR is returned if the field is not present on

the SIM.

<spi>

Description

String

String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; character

set as specified by command Select TE character set

+CSCS

13.4 AT*EALS

Ericsson Request ALS Status

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Requests current status

for ALS

AT*EALS

• *EALS: <status>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EALS=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Used to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status.

The information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the user

has two lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line is

then indicated on the display.

Description

ALS function is not active (off)

ALS function is active (on)

217

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

13.5 AT*ECSP

Ericsson Customer Service Profile

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read the customer

service profile from the

SIM

AT*ECSP=<service

group>

• *ECSP: <service

group>,<services>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ECSP=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from

the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are

user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP.

The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8

services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which

services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.

<service

group>

Description

Byte

Each service group has a corresponding number, service

group code

Description

byte

Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the service

group

Bit=0: unused or unavailable service

Bit=1: available service

218

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

13.6 AT*EPNR

Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read entries in SIM

preferred list

AT*EPNR=<format>

[,<index1>

[,<index2]]

• *EPNR:

<index1>,<oper1>[...]

*EPNR: <index2>,

<oper2>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command is

supported

AT*EPNR=?

• *EPNR: (list of

supported <index>s),

(list of supported

<format>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks

(EF ).

PLMNSEL

Description

integer

Start index (>0)

Description

integer

Stop index (>0)

Description

Numeric <oper>

<oper>

Description

string

String indicates the code for the operator.

E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).

PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network

Example

AT*EPNR=2,1,10

*EPNR: 1,“24008”

*EPNR: 2,“20404”

*EPNR: 3,“20810”

*EPNR: 4,“20205”

*EPNR: 5,“65501”

*EPNR: 6,“26203”

*EPNR: 7,“50503”

*EPNR: 8,“27201”

*EPNR: 9,“64101”

219

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

*EPNR: 10,“27801”

13.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Write/delete entries in

SIM preferred list

AT*EPNW=[<index>]

[,<format>,<oper>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EPNW=?

• *EPNW: (list of

supported

<index>s), (list of

supported

<format>)s

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks

(EF ). The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code

PLMNSEL

(MCC) and mobile network code (MNC).

<index>

Description

Integer

Index to entry in SIM preferred list.

The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions

according to GSM 11.11

Description

Numeric <oper>

<oper>

Description

String

String indicates the code for the operator.

E.g. GSM – Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).

PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network

220

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

13.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request SIM Serial

number

AT*E2SSN?

<SSN>

Shows if the command

is supported

AT*E2SSN=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field

(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE.

This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.

<SSN>

Description

String without

double quotes

SIM serial number

EXAMPLES

AT*E2SSN?

8944110063503224707

where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is

984411003605234207F7.

Test command:

AT*E2SSN=?

221

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

13.9 AT*ESLN

Ericsson Set Line Name

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the line name tag

in the MS

AT*ESLN=<line>

[,<name>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ESLN?

• *ESLN:

*ESLN: <line2>,<name2>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESLN=?

• *ESLN: (list of supported

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Sets the name tag for a selected line.

<line>

Description

This means that the two lines will use the default name

tags, i.e. “L1” and “L2”. Default value

Line 1

Line 2

<name>

Description

String

Characters for name tag

This parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0

<lname>

Description

Integer

Maximum number of characters to use in <name> string

(20)

222

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

13.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read IMSI

AT+CIMI

• <IMSI>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CIMI=?

• OK

• ERROR

Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM

attached to the ME.

<IMSI>

Description

string without

double quotes

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Example

AT+CIMI

234157411545420

13.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request facility lock

AT+CLCK=<fac>,

[,<class>]]

• when <mode>=2 and

command successful:

+CLCK:

[<CR><LF>+CLCK:

<status>,<class2>[...]]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CLCK=?

• +CLCK: (list of

supported <fac>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network

facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions.

223

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (refer

to GSM 02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on

other GSM supplementary services, is described in the GSM standard.

<fac>

Description

“PS”

PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when

other than current SIM card inserted)

“SC”

SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up

and when this lock command issued)

“FD”

“P2”

“AO”

“OI”

“AI”

“IR”

SIM fixed dialling feature. PIN2 is required as a password

SIM PIN2

BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)

BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)

BAIC (bar all incoming calls)

BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the

home country)

“OX”

BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to

home country)

“AB”

“AG”

“AC”

“PN”

“PU”

“PP”

“PC”

All barring services

All out going barring services

All in coming barring services

Network personalization

Network subset personalization

Service provider personalization

Corporate personalization

<mode>

Description

Unlock

Lock

Query status

Full lock (only valid for <fac>=“PS”, after power on always

ask for password)

Description

Not active

Active

224

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

<passw>

Description

string type

Is the same as password specified for the facility from the

ME user interface or with change password command,

+CPWD

Description

Voice L1

Data

Fax

Short message service

Data circuit sync

Data circuit async

Dedicated packet access

Voice L2

128

1..30

When “no reply” is enabled or queried, this gives the time

in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Default

value is 20

13.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request subscriber

number

AT+CNUM

• +CNUM:

[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>

[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR>

<LF>+CNUM:

[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>

[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][…]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CNUM=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this

information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has

different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a

separate line.

Description

Alphanumeric

string

Associated with <numberx>; used character set should be

the one selected with the Select TE character set

command, +CSCS

225

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

String type

Phone number of format specified by <typex>

<typex>

Description

Integer format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)

<speed>

Description

data rate

As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07

Description

Asynchronous modem

Voice

Fax

<itc>

Description

3.1kHz

UDI

13.13 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request connected

line identification

presentation

AT+COLP=[<n>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+COLP?

• +COLP: <n>,<m>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+COLP=?

• +COLP: (list of

supported <n>s)

• OK

• ERROR

This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP

(Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling

subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party

after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or

disables the presentation of the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the

execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network.

226

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), +COLP:

<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] intermediate

result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter

responses. It is manufacturer specific if this response is used when

normal voice call is established.

Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an

interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according

3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>).

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

<n>

Description

Disable

Enable

<m>

Description

COLP not provisioned

COLP provisioned

unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)

Intermediate Result codes:

+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]

227

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

13.14 AT+COPS Operator Selection

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request operator

selection

AT+COPS=[<mode> • +CME ERROR <err>

[,<format>

[,<oper>]]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+COPS?

• +COPS:

<mode>[,<format>,

<oper>]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+COPS=?

• +COPS: list of supported

(<stat>,long

alphanumeric <oper>,

short alphanumeric

<oper>,numeric

<oper>)s

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.

<mode>

Description

Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)

Manual (<oper> field present)

Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not

attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field is

ignored); this value is not applicable in read command

response

Manual/automatic (<oper> field present); if manual

selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered

Description

Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)

Numeric <oper>

<oper>

Description

string type

Format determined by the <format> setting

<stat>

Description

Unknown

Available

Current

Forbidden

228

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

Example

AT+COPS=?

+COPS: (2,“UK VODAFONE”,“UK Vodafone”,“23415”)

+COPS: (3,“UK Orange PCS Ltd”,“Orange”,“23433”)

+COPS: (3,“T-Mobile UK”,“T-Mobile UK”,“23430”)

+COPS: (3,“O2 - UK”,“O2 - UK”,“23410”)

13.15 AT+CREG Network Registration

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request network

registration

AT+CREG=[<n>]

AT+CREG?

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

• +CREG: <n>,<stat>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CREG=?

• +CREG: (list of

supported <n>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code

+CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network

registration status.

Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an

integer <stat>, which shows whether the network has currently

indicated the registration of the ME.

Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.

<n>

Description

Disable network registration unsolicited result code.

Default value

Enable network registration unsolicited result code

229

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<stat>

Description

Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new

operator to register with

Registered, home network

Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new

operator to register with

Registration denied

Not detailed

Registered, roaming

Example

AT+CREG?

+CREG: 0,1

13.16 AT*ECPI

Ciphering Indicator

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request activation of

the ciphering

AT*ECPI=<switch>

AT*ECPI?

• OK

• +CME: <error>

• ERROR

indication

Shows the current

setting

• *ECPI: <switch>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ECPI=?

• *ECPI: (list of supported

<switch>es values)

• OK

• ERROR

This command allows the external application to activate/deactivate the

ciphering indication. The ciphering indication allows the external

application to detect when the mobile connection becomes deciphered

and thus unsecured.

Test command gives the current value of the <switch> parameter,

informing if the indicator is enabled or disabled.

The ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network

operator setting data in the “administrative data” field (EFAD) in the

SIM as defined in GSM 11.11.

230

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

If this feature is not disabled by the SIM, then whenever a connection is

in place, which is or becomes deciphered, an indication is given via the

unsolicited result code *ECPV:<ciphering>.

Description

Ciphering indication is on. The unsolicited result code

*ECPV is sent anytime the communication is unsecured

and when it becomes secure again

Ciphering indication is off. Disable the ciphering

indication, *ECPV is not sent

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*ECPV: <ciphering>. Sent only when <switch> is set to 0.

Unsolicited Result Codes

*ECPV - Ciphering Indicator

SYNTAX - Unsolicited Result code

Description

Response

When

Set command informs

the TE when a

communication is

unsecured due to the

fact that the network

is not enciphering the

communication

*ECPV: <ciphering>

When AT*ECPI enables it,

the *ECPV:<ciphering> is

sent during a connection

whenever the

communication is not

enciphered. If a

connection becomes

secure after that, the

*ECPV:<ciphering> is sent

again to indicate that now

the communication is

enciphered

Description

The connection is secured. The network enciphers the

communication

The connection is unsecured. The network does not

encipher the communication

231

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

13.17 AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Neighbour

AT*E2NBTS=<ch1>,<bsic1>[,<ch2

• ERROR

• OK

Cells to monitor >,<bsic2>[,<ch3>,<bsic3>[,<ch4

>,<bsic4>[,<ch5>,<bsic5>[,<ch6

>,<bsic6>[,<ch7>,<bsic7>[,<ch8

>,<bsic8>[,<ch9>,<bsic9>[,<ch1

0>,<bsic10>[,<ch11>,<bsic11>[,<

ch12>,<bsic12>[,<ch13>,<bsic13

>[,<ch14>,<bsic14>[,<ch15>,<bsi

c15>[,<ch16>,<bsic16>]]]]]]]]]]]]]

]]

Show the

current setting

AT*E2NBTS?

• *E2NBTS:

<mcc>,<mnc>,

<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

<mcc>,<mnc>,

<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

…

<mcc>,<mnc>,

<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2NBTS=?

• *E2NBTS: (list of

supported <ch>s)

• ERROR

The set command shall provide with the ARFCNs (<ch>) and the BSIC

(the BSIC is a cell colour code) to the MS in order to monitor those

channels, belonging to the neighbour cells, instead of the ones that come

through the air interface, in the serving cell information broadcast

channel.

It is possible to update that information with up to 16 neighbour cells.

If less than 16 <ch>s are provided, then the assigned channels shall

substitute the last previous channel (given either by the BCCH or by

another AT*E2NBTS command), if it is not in the list yet. Therefore,

<ch1>,<bsic1> will substitute BTS 16 in the MS, <ch2>,<bsic2> to the

BTS 15 and so on. If any of the <ch>s is already in the top-list, then it

is skipped.

The read command displays the data of every neighbour cell, including

the following parameters: MCC, MNC, Cell ID, BSIC, Channel and Rx

Level.

<ch>

Description

(0-1023)

It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF

Channel, which identifies a BCCH carrier

232

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. NETWORK

<mcc>

Description

String Type

Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code

identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU

<mnc>

Description

String Type

Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code

identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell

<ci>

Description

String type

Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

<bsic>

Description

String Type

One byte Base Stations Identification code in

hexadecimal format

<rxl>

Description

String Type

Received Signal Strength level in dBm, measured in idle

mode

233

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

234

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. Phonebook

14.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request phone book

checksum

AT*E2PBCS

• *E2PBCS: <cks>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2PBCS=?

• OK

• ERROR

Command causes the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks>

stored internally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there

is a change in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the external

application can detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, without

downloading the whole phone book.

During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to download

the phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the number

of entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum has

been calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.

<cks>

Description

Hex type

1 byte in hexadecimal (between “”), containing the

checksum

14.2 AT*ESAG

Ericsson Add to Group

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Adds a new item to the

group with <gindex>

AT*ESAG=<gindex>,

<type>,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESAG=?

• *ESAG: (list of

supported

<gindex>s, list of

supported <type>s

• OK

• ERROR

This command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group.

235

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

1-10

The group index within the hierarchical phone book

<type>

Description

Contact

Phone number

Description

Integer

The index of the contact/group/phone number to add.

The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning: if

the item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the index

of the contact in the contacts book. If the item to add is a

phone number the <itemindex> is the index in the phone

book

14.3 AT*ESCG

Ericsson Create Group

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Adds a new group to

the hierarchical phone

book

AT*ESCG=<name>

AT*ESCG=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Shows if the command

is supported

• *ESCG:

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. The

group is stored at the first available position. There are 10 group

positions in the hierarchical phone book.

<name>

Description

String

The group name. Character set as specified by

command Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)

Description

integer

The maximum length of the grouping (bytes)

236

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

14.4 AT*ESCN

Ericsson Set Credit Card Number

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set up a credit

card number

AT*ESCN=<mode>

[,<passwd>][,<indexn>]

[,<asn>,<type>,<name>,

<vercode>[,<send

order>]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

when mode=3:*ESCN:

<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,

<name>,<vercode>,

When mode=4:*ESCN:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*ESCN=?

• *ESCN: (list of supported

<index>s),(list of

supported <mode>s),(list

of supported <send

order>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Command is used to:

• set up a credit card number in the ME.

• disable credit card calls.

• enable one of the credit card call services.

• query the settings for one of the services.

• query the active credit call access server.

<mode>

Description

Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,

<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]). The

four (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,

<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode>=0. If all those

are not submitted ERROR will be returned

Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any other

parameters are submitted, they are ignored

Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,

<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they

are ignored

Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters are

submitted, they are ignored

Query for the selected credit call access server. If any

parameters are submitted, they are ignored

Description

String

character string, phone lock code “PS”, PH-SIM

237

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

Index number to the first credit card call access server

Index number to the second credit card call access server

Description

Credit card calling disabled

Index number to the first credit card call access server

Index number to the second credit card call access server

<asn>

Description

String

Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phone

number of format specified by <typex>

<type>

Description

Integer format Type of address

<name>

Description

String

Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of

18 characters

Description

String

Character string <0..9,#,*>. Maximum of 20 characters

Description

Verification code first. Default value

phone number to call first

238

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

14.5 AT*ESDG

Ericsson Delete Group

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Deletes a group

defined in the

hierarchical phone

book

AT*ESDG=<gindex>

AT*ESDG=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

Show if the command

is supported

• *ESDG: list of

<gindex>s

• OK

This command deletes the group at position <gindex> from the

hierarchical phone book.

Description

1-10

The group index

14.6 AT*ESDI

Ericsson Delete Group Item

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Deletes the item in

group <gindex> with

position <index>

AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<ind

ex>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESDI=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The command deletes the item with <index> in the group with

<gindex>.

Description

1-10

The groups index within the hierarchical phone book

<index>

Description

1-15

The items index within the group

239

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

14.7 AT*ESGR

Ericsson Group Read

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Lists the groups defined

in the hierarchical

phone book

AT*ESGR

• *ESGR: <gindex1>,

<gindex2>,

<name2>..]

• OK

• ERROR

Shows if the command

is supported

AT*ESGR=?

This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.

Description

1-10

The group index

<name>

Description

String

The group name

14.8 AT*EGIR

Ericsson Group Item Read

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Lists the items in the

<gindex> group

AT*EGIR=<gindex>

• *EGIR: <index1>,

[<CF><LF><index2>,

[...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EGIR=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command lists the items stored in the group identified by

<gindex>.

Description

1-10

The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook

<index>

Description

1-15

The items index within the group

<type>

Description

Integer

The kind of item. See AT*ESAG <item> table for definition

240

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

Description

Integer

The item's index within the phonebook/contacts/group

14.9 AT*ESIL

Ericsson Silence Command

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the MS to silent

mode

AT*ESIL=[<mode>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ESIL?

• *ESIL: <mode>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESIL=?

• *ESIL: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command orders the phone to be in silent mode. When the phone

is in silent mode, all sounds from the MS are prevented.

<mode>

Description

Silent mode off. Default value

Silent mode on

241

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

14.10 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets a number in the

AT*ESNU=<type>,

<number>[,<number

type>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ESNU?

• *ESNU: <type 1>,

<number 1>,

<CR><LF> ….*ESNU:

<type n>,

<number n>,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ESNU=?

• *ESNU: (list of

supported <type>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, in

the MS.

<type>

Description

Voice L1

Voice L2

Fax

Data

Description

129

Default value when dialling string does not include the

international access code character ‘+’

145

Default value when dialling string includes the

international access code character ‘+’

Description

0-9, +

Number

242

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

14.11 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Show the current

setting

+CPBF=<findtext>

• +CPBF:

<index1>,<number>,<type>,

<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+CBPF:

<index2>,<number>,<type>,

<text>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

+CPBF=?

• +CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Returns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with

<findtext>. Only currently selected source will be searched for,

Description

string type

Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as

specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS

14.12 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read phone

book entries

+CPBR=<index1>

[,<index2>]

• +CPBR:<index1>,<number>,

<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,

<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:

<index2>,<number>,<type>,

<text>[,<text_date>,

<text_time>]]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

+CPBR=?

• +CPBR: (list of supported

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...

<index2> from the current phone book memory storage selected with

+CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned.

Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number

stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated

with the number.

Description

integer type

Values in the range of location numbers of phone book

memory

243

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

string type

Phone number of format <type>

<type>

Description

129

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

unknown

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

161

128 - 255

<text>

Description

string type

Field of maximum length <tlength>;

character set as specified by the select TE character set

command, +CSCS.

Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

Example

AT+CPBR=1,99

+CPBR: 1,“44123456789”,145,“Test Number”

+CPBR: 2,“440987654321”,145,“Test number 2”

+CPBR: 3,“449876543210”,129,“Test Number 3”

244

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

14.13 AT+CPBS Phone Storage

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set phone book

storage

AT+CPBS=<storage>

[,<password>]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CPBS?

• +CPBS: <storage>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CPBS=?

• +CPBS: (list of

supported

<storage>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Selects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by other

phone book commands. Read command returns currently selected

memory, and when supported by manufacturer, number of used

locations and total number of locations in the memory.

Description

“FD”

“EN”

“ME”

“SM”

“DC”

“RC”

“MC”

Fixed dialled numbers

Emergency numbers

ME phone book

SIM phone book

ME dialled calls list (30 entries)

ME received calls list (30 entries)

ME missed calls list (30 entries)

Description

String type

Represents the password required when selecting

password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for

storage “ME”

245

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

14.14 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request phone book

write

AT+CPBW=[<index>]

[, <number>[,<type>

[,<text>]]]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CPBW=?

• +CPBW: (list of

supported

,(list of supported

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the current

phone book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the

<number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If

<index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the

first free location in the phone book.

<index>

Description

integer type

Values in the range of location numbers of phone book

memory

Description

string type

Phone number of format <type>

<type>

Description

integer format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string

includes international access code character "+",

otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)

129

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

unknown

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

161

128-255

<text>

Description

string type

Field of maximum length <tlength>;

character set as specified by the select TE character set

command, +CSCS

Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

246

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

Description

integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

Example

AT+CPBW=1,“44123456789”,145,“Test Number”

AT+CPBW=2,“440987654321”,145,“Test number 2”

AT+CPBW=3,“449876543210”,129,“Test Number 3”

14.15 AT*ECAW Ericsson Callers Allowed Write

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Write to or remove

from CA list

AT*ECAW=[<CAindex>] • +CME ERROR <err>

,[<groupname>][,[<stor

age>],[<PBindex>][,<CL

UID>]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*ECAW=?

• *ECAW: (list of supported

<CAindex>s),<gn_length

>,(list of supported

<storage>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Command is used for writing entries to and removing entries from the

Callers Allowed (CA) list.

If only <CAindex> is given, the entry at position <CAindex> will be

deleted.

If only <groupname> is given, a reference (group name) to a group is

added to the CA list.

If only <storage> and <PBindex> are given, a reference (PB index) to a

phonebook entry is added to the Callers Allowed (CA) list.

If only <CLUID> is given, a reference (CLUID) to the unique identifier

to a contact is added to the CA list.

Supplying <CAindex> and any of the following parameters will result

in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err>.

If writing fails in an ME, error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

247

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Test command returns location range supported by the CA list and the

supported storages.

Description

Integer type

Values in the range of location numbers of CA list

<groupname> Description

String format

Name of callers allowed group

Description

ME phonebook

Description

Integer type

Values in the range of location numbers of phonebook

memory

<CLUID>

Description

Integer format LUID for contact

14.16 AT*ECAR Ericsson Callers Allowed Read

Description

Command

Possible Responses

List calls allowed

AT*ECAR=

[,<Caindex2>]

• *ECAR:<CAindex>,[<groupname>][,

[<storage>],[<PBindex>][,CLUID]]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*ECAR=?

• *ECAR: (list of supported

<CAindex>s),<gn_length>,(list of

supported <storage>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command returns entries in the Callers Allowed list. The list

consists of a mix of phonebook entries, contacts and groups. The

response consists of list index <CAindex> and one of the following

types: <groupname>, phonebook storage <storage> plus phonebook

index <PBindex>, or unique identifier to a contact <CLUID>. If

<CAindex2> is supplied, all list items from <CAindex1> to

<CAindex2> will be returned.

248

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. PHONEBOOK

If listing fails in a ME +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

Description

Integer format Start value of location number

<groupname> Description

String format

Name of callers allowed group

<CLUID>

Description

Integer format LUID for contact

Refer to the AT*ECAW command for the <storage> and <PBindex>

parameters.

249

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

250

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. Short Message Services - Point to Point

15.1 AT+CPIN

PIN Control

See 3.26, AT+CPIN PIN Control

15.2 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages

See 6.10, AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages

15.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage

Common for both PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and Text Modes

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set preferred

message storage

AT+CPMS=<mem1>

[,<mem2>]

[,<mem3>]

• +CPMS:

<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CPMS?

• +CPMS:

<mem1>,<used1>,<total1,

<mem2>,<used2>,<total2,

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CPMS=?

• +CPMS: (list of supported

<mem1>s),(list of

supported <mem2>s),(list

of supported <mem3>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for

reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME

(but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is

returned.

251

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.

<mem1>

Description

string type

Memory from which messages are read and deleted

(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message

+CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD)

“ME”

“SM”

ME message storage

SIM message storage. Default value

<mem2>

Description

string type

Memory to which writing and sending operations are

made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS

and Write Message to Memory +CMGW)

“ME”

“SM”

ME message storage

SIM message storage

<mem3>

Description

string type

Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored

(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs are

always stored in “BM” (or some manufacturer specific

storage) unless directly forwarded to TE

“ME”

“SM”

ME message storage

SIM message storage

<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Description

integer type

Total number of messages currently in

<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively

<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> Description

integer type

Total number of message locations in

<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively

Examples

AT+CPMS=?

+CPMS: (“ME”,“SM”),(“ME”,“SM”),(“ME”,“SM”)

AT+CPMS?

+CPMS: “ME”,0,40,“SM”,1,15,“ME”,0,40

252

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

AT+CPMS=“sm”,“sm”,“sm”

+CPMS: 1,15,1,15,1,15

15.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address

Common for both PDU and Text Modes

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set service centre

address

AT+CSCA=<sca>

[,<tosca>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CSCA?

• +CSCA:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CSCA=?

• OK

• ERROR

Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are

transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and

write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the

same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded

into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the number

in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number

starting with “+” will always be treated as an international number.

<sca>

Description

string type

GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Value

field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default

alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the

currently selected TE character set

<tosca>

Description

integer type

GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-address

octet in integer format

129

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

unknown

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

161

128-255

253

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Example

AT+CSCA?

+CSCA: “44385016005”,145

15.5 AT+CMGF Message Format

Common for both PDU and Text Modes

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set message format

AT+CMGF=<mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CMGF?

• +CMGF: <mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMGF=?

• +CMGF: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• OK

• ERROR

This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for

messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages

used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result

codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode

(entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the

messages given as separate parameters).

Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.

<mode>

Description

PDU mode

Text mode

254

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

15.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory

PDU Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Write message to

memory

AT+CMGW=<length>

[,<stat>]<CR>

PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>

• +CMGW: <index>

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMGW=?

• OK

• ERROR

Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location

<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status

will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat> allows other status

values to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use different

default <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is the

same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing

fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See

“AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage”, page 251.

<stat>

Description

Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu>

Description

...

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by

GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts

each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long

hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is

presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

255

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Write message to

memory

AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>

[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]

<CR>

Text is entered <ctrl-Z/

ESC>

• +CMGW: <index>

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMGW=?

• OK

• ERROR

Stores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory

storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is

returned. By default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but

parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given. The

entering of text is done as specified in the send message command,

+CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is

returned.

Note!

SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be stored in

text mode.

<stat>

Description

Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

<oa>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <tooa>

<da>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <toda>

<tooa>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (default refer <toda>)

<toda>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)

default is 145, otherwise default is 129

256

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

15.7 AT+CMGS Send Message

PDU Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send message

AT+CMGS=<length>

<CR>

PDU is given<ctrl-Z/

ESC>

• +CMGS:

<mr>[,<ackpdu>]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMGS=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message

reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message

delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is

network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify

message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending

fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:

<err> is returned. This command is abortable.

• <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer

data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded).

• The TA shall send a four character sequence

<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after

command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given

from TE to ME/TA.

• The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.

• The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by

V.25ter echo command E.

• The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for

<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into the

actual octets of PDU.

• When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>)

equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre

Address +CSCA is used.

• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).

• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU.

<mr>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

257

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

Description

...

GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is

same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11

SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by

double quote characters like a normal string type

parameter

Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send message

AT+CMGS=<da>

[,<toda>] <CR>

Text is entered<ctrl-Z/

ESC>

• +CMGS:

<mr>[,<scts>]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMGS=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message

reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message

delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is

network support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify

message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending

fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:

<err> is returned. This command is abortable.

• The entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>

and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP and

Service Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the actual

PDU in the ME/TA.

• The TA shall send a four character sequence

<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after the

command line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can be

entered from the TE to the ME/TA.

• The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.

• The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by

V.25ter echo command E.

• The entered text should be formatted as follows:

if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default

alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-

Data-Header-Indication is not set:

258

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select

TE Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the

entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex

A; backspace can be used to delete last character and

carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four

character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every

carriage return entered by the user);

if TE character set is “HEX”: the entered text should consist

of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which

ME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g.

17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character Π (GSM

23));

if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used

or <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-

Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRA

character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into

8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be

converted to an octet with integer value 42).

• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).

• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the

message body.

<da>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <toda>

<toda>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)

default is 145, otherwise default is 129

<mr>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string

format (refer <dt>)

<scts>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference

259

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Example

AT+CMGF=1

AT+CSDH=1

AT+CSMP=17,167,0,0

AT+CMGS=“+447747008670”

> Test SMSꢀ

+CMGS: 15

15.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage

PDU mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send from storage

AT+CMSS=<index>

• +CMSS: <mr>

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMSS=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sends message with location value <index> from message storage

<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).

Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message

delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code

+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. See

“AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage”, page 251.

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

<mr>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

260

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send from storage

AT+CMSS=<index>

[,<da> [,<toda>]]

• +CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMSS=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sends message with location value <index> from message storage

<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).

Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message

delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network

supports, <scts> is returned. If sending fails in a network or an ME

error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This

command is abortable.

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

<da>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <toda>

<toda>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)

default is 145, otherwise default is 129

<scts>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string

format (refer <dt>)

<mr>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

261

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

15.9 AT+CMGC

Send Command

PDU Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send command

message

AT+CMGC=<length><CR>

• if PDU mode

(+CMGF=0) and

sending successful:

+CMGC:

<mr>[,<ackpdu>]

• if sending fails:

+CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMGC=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-

COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message

command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the

TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS

<service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned.

Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status

report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final

result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is

abortable.

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu>

Description

String

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by

GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts

each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long

hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is

presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

<mr>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

Description

String

GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is

same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11

SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by

double quote characters like a normal string type

parameter

262

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send command

message

AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>

[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]

<CR>

• if PDU mode

(+CMGF=1) and

sending successful:

+CMGC:

Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>

<mr>[,<scts>]

• if sending fails:

+CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

commands is

supported

AT+CMGC=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-

COMMAND). The entering of text is as specified in the send message

command, +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA

character long hexadecimal numbers, which the ME/TA converts into

8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS). Message reference value <mr> is

returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when

+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> is

returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited

delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME

error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This

command is abortable.

<fo>

Description

First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format

First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format

First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format

First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format

<ct>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type. Default value is 0

<pid>

Description

0-255

Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,

according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9

<mn>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number

263

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<da>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <toda>

<toda>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)

default is 145, otherwise default is 129

<mr>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

<scts>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string

format (refer to <dt>)

15.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE

PDU Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set new message

indication to TE

AT+CNMI=[<mode>

[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>

]]]]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CNMI?

• +CNMI:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CNMI=?

• +CNMI:

(list of supported <mode>s),

(list of supported <mt>s),

(list of supported <bm>s),

(list of supported <ds>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from

the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal

is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is

carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).

264

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or

network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

<mode>

Description

Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE

link specific inband technique used to embed result

codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode

<mt>

Description

No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.

No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as

preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the

SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error

message accordingly to GSM 03.38

SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the

memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result

code:

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed

directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not

stored in ME/TA:

+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode

enabled)

Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined

in <mt>=1

Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using

unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>.

Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of

other data coding schemes result in indication as defined

in <mt>=1

<bm>

Description

Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific

memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE

New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited

result code:

+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled).

New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory

<ds>

Description

No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-

REPORT is stored in ME/TA

SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited

result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU

mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA

SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited

result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled).

SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA

Unsolicited Result codes:

265

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

+CDSI: <mem><index>

Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set new message

indication to TE

AT+CNMI=[<mode>

[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>

]]]]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CNMI?

• +CNMI:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CNMI=?

• +CNMI:

(list of supported <mode>s),

(list of supported <mt>s),

(list of supported <bm>s),

(list of supported <ds>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from

the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal

is ON. If TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is

carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).

If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or

network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

<mode>

Description

Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE

link specific inband technique used to embed result

codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode

266

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<mt>

Description

No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.

No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as

preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the

SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error

message accordingly to GSM 03.38

SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the

memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result

code:

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed

directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code:

+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [ ,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,

<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode

enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show

text mode command, +CSDH

Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using

unsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [

,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR>

<LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About parameters in

italics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH.

Messages of other data coding schemes result in

indication as defined in <mt>=1

<bm>

Description

Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific

memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE

New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited

result code:

+CBM:

(Text mode enabled)

<ds>

Description

No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE

SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited

result code: : +CDS:

<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode

enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA

SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited

result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text mode enabled).

SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA

Unsolicited Result codes:

+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>

[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF>

<data> (Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command,

+CSDH for information on the parameters in italics.

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>

+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>

+CDSI: <mem><index>

267

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Example

Display cell broadcast messages:

AT+CNMI=3,0,2,0,0

15.11 AT+CMGR Read Message

PDU Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read

message

AT+CMGR=

<index>

• +CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMGR=?

• OK

• ERROR

Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message

storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message

data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘received

unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails,

final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

<stat>

Description

Received unread message (i.e. new message)

Received read message

Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

<alpha>

Description

String type

Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not

omitted

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

268

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<pdu>

Description

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by

GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts

each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long

hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is

presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

Note!

It is possible to send SMS in PDU mode, if help for this is required then

please contact customer support.

269

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Read

message

AT+CMGR=

[<index>]

• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-DELIVER:

+CMGR:

<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<tooa>,

<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,

• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-SUBMIT:

+CMGR:

<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>,

<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,

• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:

+CMGR:

<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],

• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-COMMAND:

+CMGR:

<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],

[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><cdata>]

• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and CBM storage:

+CMGR:

<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMGR=?

• OK

• ERROR

Returns messages with location index <index> from message storage

<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer

command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of the

message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received

read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by

<mem1>

<stat>

Description

Received unread message (new message)

Received read message

Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

270

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<oa>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <tooa>

<da>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <toda>

<toda>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)

default is 145, otherwise default is 129

<tooa>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (default refer <toda>)

<tora>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in

integer format (default refer <toda>)

<alpha>

Description

String type

Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not

omitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should

be. Used character set should be the one selected with

command Select TE Character Set +CSCS

<scts>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string

format (refer <dt>)

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

271

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<data>

The entered text should be formatted as follows:

if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and

<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:

if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set

+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet

according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last

character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four

character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return

entered by the user);

if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA

character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit

characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to

character Π (GSM 23));

if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates

that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should

consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts

into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an

octet with integer value 42);

sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)

<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body

<fo>

Description

First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format

First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format

First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format

First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format

<mr>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference

<ra>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM

default alphabet) are converted to characters of the

currently selected TE character set (refef command

+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>

<dt>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/mm/

dd,hh:mm:ss±zz where characters indicate year, month,

day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone

<st>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-status

272

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<ct>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP--command-type. Default value is 0

<sn>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.41 CBM serial number

<mid>

Description

String type

All different possible combinations of CBM message

identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);

e.g. “0,1,5-7”

<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer format

<page>

Description

Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer format

<pages>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer format

<pid>

Description

0 - 255

Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,

according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9

<dcs>

Description

0 - 255

Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 and

compressed text not supported

<sca>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string

format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet

characters) are converted to characters of the currently

selected TE character set

<tosca>

Description

Integer type

GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer

format

129

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

unknown

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

161

128 - 255

273

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<vp>

Description

0 - 143

(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous)

12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)

(TP-VP-166) x 1 day

144 - 167

168 - 196

197 - 255

(TP-VP-192) x 1 week

<mn>

Description

Integer type

GSM 03.40 TP-message-number

Example

AT+CMGR

R1A100

CXC1122112

15.12 AT+CMGL List Message

PDU Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

List message

AT+CMGL [=<stat>] • +CMGL:

+CMGL:

<CR><LF><pdu>[…]]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMGL=?

• +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)

Note!

Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message

storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If

status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes

to ‘received read’. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR:

<err> is returned.

<stat>

Description

Received unread message (i.e. new message)

274

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<stat>

Description

Received read message

Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

<alpha>

Description

String type

Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not

omitted

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu>

Description

In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by

GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts

each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long

hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is

presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

275

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Text Mode

Description

List message

Command

Possible Responses

AT+CMGL

=[<stat>]

• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-SUBMITs and SMS-

DELIVERs:

+CMGL:

<index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],

[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]

+CMGL:

<index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],

[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]

<CR><LF><data>[…]]

• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:

+CMGL:

<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>, [<ra>],

[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> [<CR><LF>

+CMGL:

<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],

[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]

• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and SMS-COMMANDs:

+CMGL:

+CMGL:

<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[…]]

• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command

successful and CBM storage:

+CMGL:

<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,

+CMGL:

<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,

<pages><CR><LF> <data>[…]]

• Otherwise:

+CMS ERROR: <err>

Show the

current

setting

AT+CMGL?

• +CMGL:<stat>

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CMGL=?

• +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

Returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage

<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer

command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of the

message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received

read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by

<mem1>

276

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<stat>

Description

Integer

Indicates the status of messages in memory

Received unread message (new message)

Received read message

Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)

<oa>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <tooa>

<da>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;

BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are

converted to characters of the currently selected TE

character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given

by <toda>

<toda>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)

default is 145, otherwise default is 129

<tooa>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet

in integer format (default refer <toda>)

<tora>

Description

String type

GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in

integer format (default refer <toda>)

<alpha>

Description

String type

Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not

omitted i.e.

commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used

character set should be the one selected with command

Select TE Character Set +CSCS

277

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<scts>

Description

String type

GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-string

format (refer <dt>)

Description

Integer type

Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC

address octets are not counted in the length)

<data>

The entered text should be formatted as follows:

if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and

<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:

if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set

+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet

according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last

character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four

character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return

entered by the user);

if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA

character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit

characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to

character Π (GSM 23));

if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates

that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should

consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts

into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an

octet with integer value 42);

sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)

<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body

<fo>

Description

First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format

First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format

First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format

First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format

<mr>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference

<ra>

Description

String

GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM

default alphabet) are converted to characters of the

currently selected TE character set (refef command

+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>

278

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

<dt>

Description

String

GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/MM/

dd,hh:mm:ss+-zz where characters indicate year, month,

day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone

<st>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Status

<ct>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0)

<sn>

Description

Integer

GSM 03.41 CBM Serial Number

<mid>

Description

String type

All different possible combinations of CBM message

identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);

e.g. "0,1,5-7"

<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer

format

<page>

Description

Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 4-7 in integer format

<pages>

Description

Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 0-3 in integer format

Example

AT+CMGF=1

AT+CMGL=?

+CMGL: “REC UNREAD”,“REC READ”,“STO UNSENT”,“STO

SENT”,“ALL”

279

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

15.13 AT+CMGD Delete Message

Common for both PDU and Text modes

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Delete message

AT+CMGD=<index>

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CMGD=?

• OK

• ERROR

Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location

<index>. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is

returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations.

<index>

Description

Integer type

Value in the range of location numbers supported by the

associated memory

15.14 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters

Only Applicable to Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set the show text

mode

AT+CSDH=[<show>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT+CSDH?

• +CSDH: <show>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CSDH=?

• +CSDH: (list of

supported <show>s)

• OK

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode

result codes.

<show>

Description

Do not show header values defined in commands

AT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,

<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in

+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and

SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR

result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,

Show the values in result codes

280

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

15.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters

Only Applicable to Text Mode

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set the text mode

parameters

AT+CSMP=[<fo

> [,<vp>[,<pid>

[,<dcs>]]]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CSMP?

• +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CSMP=?

• +CSMP: (List of supported <fo>s),

(list of supported <vp>s), (list of

supported <pid>s), (list of

supported <dcs>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent

to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is

selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the

SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The <pid>

parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates

interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs>

determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.

<fo>

Description

0-255

Depending on the command or result code: first octet of

GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value

17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default value

2) in integer format

<vp>

Description

0-143

(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hous)

12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)

(TP-VP-166) x 1 day

144-167

168-196

197-255

(TP-VP-192) x 1 week

<pid>

Description

0-255

Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,

according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9

<dcs>

Description

0-255

Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and

compressed text not supported

281

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

15.16 AT+CSCS Select Character Set

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set command informs

TA which character set

is used by the TE

AT+CSCS=<chset>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CSCS?

• +CSCS: <chset>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CSCS=?

• +CSCS: (list of

supported <chset>s)

• OK

• ERROR

This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by

the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly

between TE and ME character sets.

When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet

is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero.

Note!

How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or from, the TE

alphabet is manufacturer specific.

Read command shows current setting and test command display

conversion schemes implemented in the TA.

<chset>

Description

“GSM”

GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1).

Default value

“IRA”

International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note:

recommended default value by GSM 07.07.

“8859-n”

“UTF-8”

ISO 8859 Latin n (1-6) character set

Universal text format, 8 bits

“ERICSSON”

Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character

set (ISO/IEC10646)

Example

AT+CSCS?

+CSCS: “GSM”

282

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

15.17 AT+CSMS Select Message Service

Common for both PDU and Text Modes

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Select message

service

AT+CSMS=<service>

• +CSMS:

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CSMS?

• +CSMS:

<service>,<mt>,<mo>,

<bm>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CSMS=?

• +CSMS: (list of

supported <service>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages

supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for

mobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If

the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the

TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

Description

GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands is

compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+

features which do not require new command syntax may

be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new

Phase 2+ data coding schemes)

2..127

Reserved

<mt>

Description

Mobile terminated messages not supported

Mobile terminated messages supported

<mo>

Description

Mobile originated messages not supported

Mobile originated messages supported

<bm>

Description

Broadcast messages not supported

Broadcast messages supported

283

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<err>

Description

0...127

GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values

128...255

300

GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values

ME failure

302

Operation not allowed

Invalid PDU mode parameter

SIM not inserted

304

310

311

SIM PIN required

312

PH-SIM PIN required

SIM failure

313

314

SIM busy

315

SIM wrong

316

SIM PUK required

317

SIM PIN2 required

318

SIM PUK2 required

Unknown error

500

...511

512...

Other values in range 256...511 are reserved

Manufacturer specific

15.18 AT*E2SMSRIRing indicator for SMS

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Enable RI for incoming

SMS

AT*E2SMSRI=<n>

AT*E2SMSRI=?

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

• *E2SMSRI: <n>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2SMSRI=?

• *E2SMSRI: (list of

supported <n>s)

• OK

• ERROR

This command enables/disables the Ring Indicator pin response to an

incoming SMS message. If enabled, a negative going pulse is generated

on receipt of an incoming SMS message. The duration of this pulse is

selectable in steps of 50ms up to a maximum of 1,150ms and is

determined by the value of <n> that is used in the command. The

command is disabled by setting <n> to 0.

284

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT

Note!

The Ring Indicator will always be active for incoming calls independent

of this setting.

<n>

Description

RI is disabled for incoming SMS messages. Default value

50-1150

RI is enabled for incoming SMS messages. Pulse duration

selectable between 50 and 1,150ms inclusive

285

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

286

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast

16.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE

See 15.10, AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE

16.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type

Common for both PDU and text modes

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Select cell broadcast

message type

AT+CSCB=[<mode>

[,<mids>]]

• +CMS ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CSCB?

• +CSCB:

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CSCB=?

• +CSCB: (list of

supported

<mode>s)

• OK

• ERROR

Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.

<mode>

Description

Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted

<mids>

Description

string type

All different possible combinations of CBM message

identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);

e.g. “0,1,5-7”

<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer

format

Example

AT+CSCB?

+CSCB: 0,“50”

287

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

288

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM Application Toolkit

17.1 AT+CPIN

PIN Control

See 3.26, AT+CPIN PIN Control

17.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings

Description

Command

Possible responses

Set the presentation of

the unsolicited result

codes corresponding to

STK

AT*E2STKS=<on_off>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current setting

AT*E2STKS?

• *E2STKS: <on_off>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command is

supported

AT*E2STKS=?

• *E2STKD: list of

supported <on_off>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of

the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands.

Parameter <on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an

unsolicited result code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally so

that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on.

If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the

messages below are not sent to the application.

The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.

<on_off>

Description

Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes

related to STK. Default value

Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes

related to STK

Unsolicited Result Codes:

The unsolicited result codes defined in sections below can be received.

289

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

17.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text

Description

Command

Possible responses

Answer to the

reception of

DISPLAY TEXT

AT*E2STKD=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2STKD=?

• *E2STKD:

(list of supported <answer>)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to

the external application by means of the unsolicited result code

*E2STKD.

Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send the

appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and

before the timeout expires.

If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR

response is generated.

Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow

GSM 11.14 standard

Description

OK.

Performed as required: the text was displayed and

cleared as requested. It corresponds to ‘00’ Command

performed successfully, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as

requested and the user wants to end the proactive

session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session terminated

by the user, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User requests backwards move: the text was displayed as

requested and the user wants to go backwards in the

session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in the

proactive SIM session requested by the user

Failed.

No response from user: the text was displayed, and

although the clear condition was “Wait for user to clear”,

the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response

from user

Failed.

Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*E2STKD: <priority>,<clear_condition>,<coding>,<text_length>,

<text>

290

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

Display normal priority text

Display high priority text

<clear_condition>

Description

Clear message after a dalay

Wait for user to clear message

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-

bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set

to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in

GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit

GSM default alphabet

<text_length>

Description

Integter type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

<text>

Description

string type

Field of maximum length <text_length>, in string type

format between "". Coding is defined in <coding>

17.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey

Description

Command

Possible responses

Answer to the

reception of

GET INKEY

AT*E2STKG=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>

[<response_type>,

<user_response>]

• OK

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2STKG=?

• *E2STKG:

(list of supported <answer>),

(list of supported

<response_type>),

<user_response>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the

external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG.

The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the user

response.

291

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Answer command allows the external application to send the

appropriate answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, and

before the timeout expires.

If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR

response is generated.

If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more

parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates

ERROR.

Test command returns the list of supported values, and the maximum

value of <prompt_text_length>.

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

OK.

Performed as required: the text was displayed. It

corresponds to ‘00’ Command performed successfully,

described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as

requested and the user wants to end the proactive

session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session

terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User requests backward move: the text was displayed

as requested and the user wants to go backwards in

the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in

the proactive SIM session requested by the user

Failed.

No response from user: the text was displayed, and the

user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response

from user

Failed.

Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed

<response_type>

Description

Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)

Response type shall be SMS default alphabet

Response type shall be “Yes/No” response

<user_response>

Description

String type

Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format

between “”. Coding is defined in <response_type>.

Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 .

Otherwise it shall be 1 byte

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*E2STKG: <coding>,<prompt_text_length>,<prompt_text>

292

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS

default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38

with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to data coding

scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default

7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as

defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding

scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet

<prompt_text_length>

Description

Integer type (0-235)

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<prompt_text>

Description

String type

Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>, in

string type format between “”. Coding is defined in

<prompt_coding>.

17.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input

Description

Command

Possible responses

Answer to the

reception of GET

INPUT

AT*E2STKI=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>

[<response_type>,

<response_length>,

<user_response>]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2STKI=?

• *E2STKI: (list of supported

<answer>),(list of supported

<response_type>),

<response_length>,

<user_response>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The ME passes the parameters within GET INPUT command to the

external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI.

The external application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response.

AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate

answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the

timeout expires.

If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR

response is generated.

If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more

parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates

ERROR.

293

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Test command returns the list of suported values, and

<prompt_text_length>.

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

OK.

Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds

to ‘00’ command performed succesfully, described in the GSM

standard

Failed.

User terminated session: the text was displayed as requested

and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds

to ‘10’ proactive session terminated by the user, described in

the GSM standard

Failed.

User requests backward move: the text was displayed as

requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session.

It corresponds to ‘11’ backward move in the proactive SIM

session requested by the user

Failed.

No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user

did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response from user

Failed.

Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed

<response_type>

Description

Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)

Response type shall be SMS default alphabet

Response type shall be “Yes/No” response

<response_length>

Description

Integer type (0-160)

Value indicating the length of response field

<user_response>. It shall be an integer within the

range between <min_length_response> and

<max_length_response>

<user_response>

Description

String type

Field of length between <min_length_response> and

<max_length_response>, in string type format between

"". Coding is defined in <response_type>.

Note!

If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of <user_response> is

1 byte. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message.

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*E2STKI: <min_length_response>,<max_length_response>,

<echo_input>,<prompt_coding>,<prompt_text_length>,

<prompt_text>

294

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

<min_length_response>

Description

Integer type (0-160)

Value indicating the minimum length of

response field <user_response>

<max_length_response> Description

Integer type (0-160)

Value indicating the maximum length of

response field <user_response>

<echo_input>

Description

The user input shall be echoed

The user input shall be hidden

<prompt_coding>

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS

default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in

GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to

data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS

default 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit

octets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds

to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default

alphabet

Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined in

GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding

scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet

<prompt_text_length>

Description

Integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<prompt_text>

Description

String type

Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>,

in string type between “”. Coding is defined in

<prompt_coding>

295

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

17.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item

Description

Command

Possible responses

Answer to the

reception of

SELECT ITEM

AT*E2STKL=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>

[<user_response>]

AT*E2STKL=?

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

• *E2STKL: (list of supported

<answer>),

(list of supported

<user_response>)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The ME passes the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the

external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKL.

Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send the

appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and

before the timeout expires.

If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR

response is be generated.

If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more

parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates

ERROR.

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

OK.

Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command

performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive

session terminated by the user, described in the GSM

standard

Failed.

User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’

Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested

by the user

Failed.

No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no

response from user

Failed.

Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed

<user_response> Description

integer type

The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It

identifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list

296

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

Unsolicited Result Codes:

E2STKL: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,<alpha_id>

[,<default>]<CR><LF>E2STKL: <item_id1>,<coding>,

<text_length>,<item1><CR><LF>[…]E2STKL: <item_idn>,

<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn><CR><LF>]

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default

7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8

set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-

bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined

in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of

7 bit GSM default alphabet

<text_length>

Description

Integer type

(0-240)

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<alpha_id>, <itemn1>,.<Itemn>

<alpha_id>

Description

String type

Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to

AND

as defined in GSM 11.11

The maximum length is fixed

Description

Integer type

The <default> parameter is a single byte between 1 and

255. It shows the default/selected item within the list

<item_idn>

Description

Integer type

The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each

item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer

<item_idn>

<itemn>

Description

String type

Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to

AND

as defined in GSM 11.11

Description

Integer type

Number of items to be presented in the following

unsolicited results

The maximum length is fixed.

297

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

17.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu

Description

Command

Possible responses

Answer to the

reception of SET

UP MENU

AT*E2STKM=<answer>,

<on_off>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2STKM=?

• *E2STKM: (list of supported

<answer>),(list of supported

<on_off>)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the

external application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, by

means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKM.

The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter

<on_off> = 0.

Answer command allows the external application to send the

appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and

before the timeout expires.

If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR

response is generated.

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

OK.

Performed as required: it corresponds to ‘00’ command

performed successfully, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User Terminated Session: the command was executed as

requested and the user wants to end the proactive

session. It corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminated

by the user, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User requests backwards move: the command was

executed as requested and the user wants to go

backwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ backward

move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user

Failed.

No response from user: the command was executed, and

the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response

from user

Failed.

Screen is busy

Failed.

Command beyond MEs capability. It corresponds to ‘30’.

It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove the

list of menu items

298

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

<on_off>

Description

Remove the current menu

New menu to be displayed

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*E2STKM: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,

<alpha_id><CR><LF>E2STKM: <item_id1>,<coding>,

<text_length>,<item1>[<CR><LF>[…]E2STKM: <item_idn>,

<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn>]

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-

bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set

to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in

GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit

GSM default alphabet

<text_length>

Description

Integer type

Value indicating the maximum length of field <alpha_id>,

<alpha_id>

Description

String type

Field of string type between "". Coding is according to

AND

as defined in GSM 11.11

The maximum length is fixed.

<item_idn>

Description

Integer type

The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each

item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer

<item_idn>

<itemn>

Description

String type

Field of string type format between “”. Coding is

according to EF

as defined in GSM 11.11

AND

Description

Integer type

Number of Items to be presented in the following

unsolicited results

The maximum length is fixed.

299

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

The parameters have no default values.

17.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)

Description

Command

Possible responses

Do the menu

selection

AT*E2STKN=<sel_item>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2STKN=?

• *E2STKN: (list of supported

<sel_item>)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means

of the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR.

The Do command allows the external application to select the menu

item in the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENU

command.

<sel_item>

Description

Integer type

The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It

identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP

MENU command. Values follow the definition described in

GSM 11.14

17.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call

Description

Command

Possible responses

Answer to the

reception of SET UP

CALL

AT*E2STKC=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT*E2STKC=?

• *E2STKC: (list of supported

<answer>)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the

external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC,

so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call.

Answer command allows the external application to send the

appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and

before the timeout expires.

If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR

response is generated.

300

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

Description

OK.

Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command

performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard

Failed.

User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive

session terminated by the user, described in the GSM

standard

Failed.

User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’

backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by

the user

Failed.

No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response

from user

Failed.

Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed

Failed.

User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to ‘22’

Failed.

User cleared down call before connection or network

release. It corresponds to ‘23’

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*E2STKC: <ton>,<dial_string>,<SetUpRequirement>,<coding>,

<text_length>,<alpha_id>

Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.

<ton>

Description

Integer type

Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as

for EF

. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed

AND

values

<dial_string>

Description

String type

Phone number of format <ton>

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-

bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set

to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in

GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit

GSM default alphabet

301

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<text_length>

Integer type (0-240)

Description

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<alpha_id>

Description

String type

Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to

AND

as defined in GSM 11.11

The maximum length is fixed

17.10 *E2STKE

STK Send Short Message

Unsolicited Result Code:

*E2STKE: <coding>, < text_length >, <alpha_id>

The ME passes the <alpha_id> within SEND SHORT MESSAGE

command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result

code *E2STKE. This informs the external application that the ME is

sending an SMS.

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It

corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in GSM

03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM

default alphabet

<text_length>

Description

Integer type (0-240)

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<alpha_id>

Description

String type

Field of string type format between “”. Coding is

according to EF

as defined in GSM 11.11

AND

‘FF’

In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha

identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’

to indicate “Sending SMS”, so that the external

application is informed

The maximum length is fixed.

302

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

17.11 *E2STKP

STK Send SS

Unsolicited Result Code:

*E2STKP: <ton>, <SS_string>, <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>,

<SS_return>

The ME passes the parameters within SEND SS command to the

external application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKP.

This informs the external application that the ME has sent an SS string

to the network, and provides the current status after this operation.

<ton>

Description

integer type

Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as

for EF

. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed

AND

values

<SS_string>

Description

String type

SS string of format <ton>

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-

bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set

to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in

GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit

GSM default alphabet

<text_length>

Description

Integer type (0-240)

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<alpha_id>

Description

String type

Field of string type format between “”. Coding is

according to EF

as defined in GSM 11.11

AND

‘FF’

In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha

identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’

to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application

is informed

The maximum length is fixed.

<SS_return>

Description

Integer type

Field of 1 byte indicating the SS Return Result Operation

code, as defined in GSM 04.80, so that the external

application is informed about the result of the SS

operation

303

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

17.12 *E2STKU

STK Send USSD

Unsolicited Result Code:

*E2STKU: <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>

Description:

The ME shall passes the <alpha_id> parameter within SEND USSD

command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result

code *E2STKU. This informs the external application that the ME is

sending a USSD string to the network.

Description

Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-

bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set

to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit

Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit

coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in

GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit

GSM default alphabet

<text_length>

Description

Integer type (0-240)

Value indicating the maximum length of field

<alpha_id>

Description

String type

Field of string type format between “”. Coding is

according to EF

as defined in GSM 11.11

AND

‘FF’

In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha

identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’

to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application

is informed

The maximum length is fixed.

304

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT

17.13 *E2STKR

STK Refresh

Unsolicited Result Code:

*E2STKR: <indicator>

The ME informs the external application about the coming REFRESH

command, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKR (eg Reset

is coming).

Description

Integer type

Indicator describes the mode that the SIM has requested

when sending a REFRESH command

SIM initialization and full file change notification

File change notification

SIM initialization and file change notification

SIM initialization

SIM reset

17.14 AT*E2STKTO

SIM Application Toolkit Settings

Parameter Command Syntax:

AT*E2STKTO = <Command>, <timer>

This command allows the external application to configure some

general settings related to STK.

Defined values:

Parameter <Command> is used to define the command that the time

parameter is going to be applied.

Parameter <timer> is used to fix the timeout period applicable to

Proactive SIM mechanism.

Description

Integer type (0-6)

It defines the command that the time parameter is

going to be applied

All the commands with timeout associated are set

to the value of <timer>

Set Up Menu command timeout is set to the value

of <timer>

305

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

Set Up Call command timeout is set to the value of

<timer>

Display Text command timeout is set to the value of

<timer>

Get Input command timeout is set to the value of

<timer>

Select Item command timeout is set to the value of

<timer>

Description

Integer type (0-99)

Specifies the value in seconds to be set in the

timeout associated with the command specified in

All the commands timeouts are set to its default

value

(1-99)

The timeout of the command specified in

<command> is set to this value

Unsolicited result code:

*E2STKTO: <command>

306

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. Supplementary Services

18.1 AT+CPIN

PIN Control

See 3.26, AT+CPIN PIN Control

18.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Reset the ACM

(Accumulated Call

Meter) value on the

SIM

AT+CACM=[<passwd>] • +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CACM?

• +CACM: <acm>

+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CACM=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in

SIM file EF . ACM contains the total number of home units for both

ACM

the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset

the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is

returned. See “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”, page

85.

Note!

This command must take into account what line is chosen with

AT*ELIN.

Read command returns the current value of ACM.

Description

String type

SIM-PIN2

<acm>

Description

String type

Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>

under +CAOC

307

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

18.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set command sets the

Advice of Charge

related accumulated

call meter maximum

value in SIM file

AT+CAMM=[<acmmax> • +CME ERROR: <err>

[,<passwd>]]

AT+CAMM?

• OK

• ERROR

ACMmax

Show the current

setting

• +CAMM:

+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CAMM=?

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum

value in SIM file EF . ACMmax contains the maximum number

ACMmax

of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM

(refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is

usually required to set the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME

ERROR: <err> is returned.

Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.

Description

String type

Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded

as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax

feature

Description

String type

SIM PIN2

308

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

18.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Execute command

AT+CAOC[=<mode>]

• [+CAOC: <ccm>]

+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CAOC?

• +CAOC: <mode>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CAOC=?

• [+CAOC: (list of

supported

<mode>s]

• OK

• ERROR

Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the

subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0,

the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME.

The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited

event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code

+CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than

every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is

made with the same command.

Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated

or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is

supported.

It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return the

supported mode values.

<mode>

Description

Query CCM value

Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

<ccm>

Description

String type

Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal

format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); value is

in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax

value in the SIM

309

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

18.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set command sets the

parameters of Advice

of Charge related

AT+CPUC=<currency>,

<ppu>[,<passwd>]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

price per unit and

currency table in SIM

file EF

PUCT

Show the current

setting

AT+CPUC?

• +CPUC:

+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CPUC=?

• OK

• ERROR

Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and

currency table in SIM file EF . PUCT information can be used to

PUCT

convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)

into currency units. SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIM

card that is used) is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an

ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT.

For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short

Message Services section.

Description

String

Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g.

SEK)

<ppu>

Description

String type

price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.

“2.66”)

Description

String type

SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2

310

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

18.6 AT*EDIF

Ericsson Divert Function

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Enable and disable

notification with the

unsolicited result code

*EDIF

AT*EDIF=<onoff>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EDIF?

• *EDIF: <onoff>

+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EDIF=?

• *EDIF: (list of

supported <onoff>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes

with the unsolicited result code *EDIF.

<onoff>

Description

Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF

Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*EDIF: <reason>,<status>,<classx>[,<number>,<type>]

311

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

18.7 AT*EIPS

Identity Presentation Set

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Sets the alpha tag to

be displayed in the ME

AT*EIPS=<ID>,

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*EIPS?

• *EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatag

mode1><CR><LF>

*EIPS: <ID2>,<alphatag

mode2><CR><LF>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*EIPS=?

• *EIPS: (list of supported

ID>s),(list of supported

<alphatag mode>s)

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of

the Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alpha

tag is the first name and the last name. The presentation is done by an

unsolicited result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.

<ID>

Description

Caller ID (*ELIP)

Called ID (*EOLP)

Description

Off

First name and last name displayed

Unsolicited Result Codes:

*ELIP:<alpha tag>

*EOLP:<alpha tag>

312

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

18.8 AT*ELIN

Ericsson Line Set

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set the current line to

<line>

AT*ELIN=<line>

• *ELIN: <line>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT*ELIN?

• *ELIN: <line>

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*ELIN=?

• *ELIN: list of

supported <line>s

+CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.

Note!

The following command reads its value from the current line and is thus

affected by the use of *ELIN:

AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter

<line>

Description

18.9 AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Send Supplementary

Service command

AT*E2SSD=<SS_String>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2SSD=?

• OK

• ERROR

This command allows the user to send a Public MMI command string

in order to activate, deactivate, interrogate or modify settings for

Supplementary Services.

Once a string is sent, the command will return OK if parsed and sent

successfully, otherwise ERROR is returned. The command does not

verify that the operation executes successfully - use the AT*E2SSI

command to gain feedback of the operation status.

313

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Refer to GSM 02.30 for Public MMI services and codes.

<SS_String>

Description

String Type

String in double quotes, containing a Public MMI

command to modify, activate, interrogate or deactivate

a Supplementary Service. String can contain values

‘0-9’, ‘*’ and ‘#’

18.10 AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Set Supplementary

Service indications

AT*E2SSI=<op>

• ERROR

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT*E2SSI?

*E2SSI: <op>

Show if the command

is supported

AT*E2SSI=?

• *E2SSI: (list of

supported <op>s)

• ERROR

This command allows the user to display the unsolicited response code

*E2SSI on network responses (either command confirmation or error

responses) for Supplementary Services. This can be used in conjunction

with the AT+CSSN command which gives responses on the network

notification of SS status.

The default setting is OFF, where responses are disabled.

<op>

Description

Disable *E2SSI indications. Default value

Enable *E2SSI indications

Unsolicited Result codes:

*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,

<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<ForwardedToNr>],

[<NoReplyConditionTime>], [<CLI_RestrictionOption>]]]

*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,

<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<SubscriptionOption>]]]

Description

OK (no error)

SSI_PASSWORD_ERROR

SSI_TOO_MANY_PARTS

SSI_COMMAND_ERROR

314

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

Description

SSI_SIM_ERROR

SSI_NUMBER_ERR

SSI_CALL_BARRED

SSI_NOT_AVAILABLE

SSI_UNSUCCESSFUL

SSI_NOT_ALLOWED

SSI_NETWORK_PROBLEM

Description

REGISTER_SS

ERASE_SS

ACTIVATE_SS

DEACTIVATE_SS

INTERROGATE_SS

Description

ALL_SS

ALL_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_SERVICES

CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION

CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION

CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION

CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION

MALICIOUS_CALL_IDENTIFICATION

ALL_FORWARDING_SERVICES

CALL_FORWARDING_UNCONDITIONAL

ALL_CONDITIONAL_FORWARDING_SERVICES

CALL_FORWARDING_ON_MOBILE_SUBSCRIBER_BUSY

CALL_FORWARDING_ON_NO_REPLY

CALL_FORWARDING_ON_SUBSCRIBER_NOT_REACHABLE

EXPLICIT_CALL_TRANSFER

ALL_CALL_COMPLETION_SERVICES

CALL_WAITING

CALL_HOLD

COMPLETION_OF_CALL_TO_BUSY_SUBSCRIBER

315

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

MULTI_PARTY

112

113

114

144

145

146

147

148

ALL_CHARGING_SS

ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_INFORMATION

ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_CHARGING

ALL_BARRING_SERVICES

BARRING_OF_OUTGOING_CALLS

BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_CALLS

BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_INTERNATIONAL_CALLS

BARRING_OF_ALL_OG_INTERNATIONAL_NON_HPLMN_

DIRECTED_CALLS

153

154

155

BARRING_OF_INCOMING_CALLS

BARRING_OF_ALL_INCOMING_CALLS

BARRING_OF_ALL_IC_CALLS_WHEN_OUTSIDE_HPLMN

Description

BEARER_SERVICE

TELE_SERVICE

Description

<TELE_SERVICE>

<BEARER_SERVICE>

TS_ALL_TELE_SERVICES

TS_SPEECH

BS_ALL_BEARER_SERVICES

BS_ALL_DATA_CDA_SERVICES

BS_DATA_CDA_300BPS

BS_DATA_CDA_1200BPS

BS_DATA_CDA_2400BPS

BS_DATA_CDA_4800BPS

BS_DATA_CDA_9600BPS

BS_ALL_DATA_CDS_SERVICES

BS_DATA_CDS_300BPS

TS_TELEPHONY

TS_EMERGENCY_CALLS

BS_DATA_CDS_1200BPS

BS_DATA_CDS_2400BPS

BS_DATA_CDS_4800BPS

BS_DATA_CDS_9600BPS

TS_ALL_SHORT_MESSAGE_SERVICES BS_ALL_PAD_ACCESS_CA_SERVICES

316

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

Description

<TELE_SERVICE>

<BEARER_SERVICE>

TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MT_PP

TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MO_PP

BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_300BPS

BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200BPS

BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200_75BPS

BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_2400BPS

BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_4800BPS

BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_9600BPS

BS_ALL_DATA_PDS_SERVICES

BS_DATA_PDS_2400BPS

BS_DATA_PDS_4800BPS

BS_DATA_PDS_9600BPS

BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDA

BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDS

BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDA

BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDS

BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_ASYNCHRONOUS

BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_SYNCHRONOUS

BS_ALL_ASYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES

TS_VIDEOTEX

TS_TELETEX

TS_ALL_FAX_SERVICES

TS_FAX_GROUP3_ALTER_SPEECH

TS_AUTOMATIC_FAX_GROUP3

TS_FAX_GROUP4

104

112

120

128

208

209

BS_ALL_SYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES

BS_12_KBIT_UNRESTRICTED_DIGITAL

TS_ALL_DATA_SERVICES

TS_ALL_TELESERVICES_EXCEPT_SMS

TS_AUXILIARY_SPEECH

TS_AUXILIARY_TELEPHONY

<SS_Status>

Description

NO_FLAG_SET

SS_STATUS_ACTIVE

SS_STATUS_REGISTERED

317

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<SS_Status>

Description

SS_STATUS_PROVISIONED

SS_STATUS_PRA

Description

String

Phone number string in double quotes

Description

0-65532

Integer value for time

<CLI_Restriction Option>

Description

PERMANENT

TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_RESTRICTED

TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_ALLOWED

Description

OVERRIDE_CATEGORY

CLI_RESTRICTION_OPTION

RESTRICTION_PER_CALL

318

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

18.11 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request

AT+CCFC=<reason> • +CME ERROR <err>

Calling

,<mode>[,<number

>[,<type>[,<class>

[,<satype>]]]]

• when <mode>=2 and

command successful:

+CCFC:

forwarding

number and

conditions

<status>,<class1>[,<number>,

+CCFC:

<status>,<class2>[,<number>,

]][...]]

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CCFC=?

• + CCFC: (list of supported

<reason>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary

service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query

are supported. When querying the status of a network service

(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should

be returned only if service is not active for any <class>.

Description

Unconditional

Mobile busy

No reply

Not reachable

All call forwarding

All conditional call forwarding

<mode>

Description

Disable

Enable

Query status

Registration

Erasure

Description

string type

String type phone number of forwarding address in format

specified by <type>

319

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

<type>

Description

integer format

129

Type of address octet

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

unknown. Default value if ‘+’ is not in <sca>

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.

Default value if ‘+’ is in <sca>

161

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number

Other values

128 - 255

Description

integer format

128

Type of subaddress octet

NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of address

signals

136

NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of address

signals

160

User defined, even number of address signals

User defined, odd number of address signals

Other values reserved

168

128 - 255

Description

integer

Sum of integers each representing a class of information.

Default value is 7

Voice L1

Data

Fax

Short message service

Data circuit sync

Data circuit async

Dedicated packet access

Dedicated PAD access

128

Description

Not active

Active

320

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

18.12 AT+CCWA Call Waiting

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request call

waiting

AT+CCWA=[<n>

[,<mode>

[,<class>]]]

• when<mode>=2 and

command successful:

+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR>

<LF>

+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]]

+CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the

current setting

AT+CCWA?

• +CCWA: <n>

+CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the

command is

supported

AT+CCWA=?

• +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)

+CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service

according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query

are supported. When querying the status of a network service

(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should

be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n>

is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code

+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the

TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable

when the network is interrogated.

The interaction of this command with other commands based on other

GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS

standards.

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

<n>

Description

Disable

Enable

<mode>

Description

Disable

Enable

Query status

321

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Description

integer

Sum of integers each representing a class of information.

Default value is 7

Voice L1

Data

Fax

Short message service

Data circuit sync

Data circuit async

Dedicated packet access

Dedicated PAD access

128

Description

Not active

Active

Description

String type

String type phone number of forwarding address in format

specified by <type>

<type>

Description

Integer format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08

10.5.4.7)

<err>

Description

Phone failure

Operation not allowed

Operation not supported

Invalid index

100

No network service

Network timeout

Unknown

Unsolicited Result Codes:

+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>

322

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

Example

AT+CCWA=?

+CCWA: (0-1)

AT+CCWA?

+CCWA: 0

18.13 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request call related

supplementary

services

AT+CHLD=<n>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CHLD=?

• +CHLD: (list of

supported <n>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command allows control of the following call related services:

• a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the

connection is retained by the network;

• multiparty conversation (conference calls);

• the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other

either active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release the

served subscriber's own connection.

Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation,

and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030.

This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (Call

Hold; refer 3GPP TS 22.083 clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer 3GPP

TS 22.084) and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS 22.091).

The interaction of this command with other commands based on other

GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS

standards.

Note!

Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11.

323

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list

of operations which are supported. The call number required by some

operations is denoted by “x” (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).

<n>

Description

...

Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SEND

button in GSM 02.30 subclause 4.5.5.1

Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy

(UDUB) for a waiting call

Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call

Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the

other (held or waiting) call

Releases a specific active call X

Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts

the other (held or waiting) call

Places all active calls on hold, except call X with which

communication is supported

Adds a held call to the conversation

Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber

from both calls (explicit call transfer)

“X” is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence

of setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by

the served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released.

New calls take the lowest available number. Where both a held and a

waiting call exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call

(i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation.

Note!

The “directory number” case shall be handled with dial command D,

and the END case with hangup command H (or +CHUP).

324

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

18.14 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request calling line

identification

AT+CLIP=<n>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CLIP?

• + CLIP : <n>,<m>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CLIP=?

• + CLIP : (list of

supported <n>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP (Calling

Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber to get

the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a

mobile terminated call. Set command enables or disables the

presentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of

the supplementary service CLIP in the network.

When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (and calling

subscriber allows), +CLIP: <number>,<type> response is returned after

every RING (or +CRING: <type>; refer to subclause “Cellular result

codes +CRC” in GSM 07.07) result code sent from TA to TE. Whether

this response is used when a normal voice call is answered, depends on

the manufacturer.

Read command gives the status of <n> and also triggers an interrogation

of the provision status of the CLIP service according to GSM 02.81

(given in <m>).

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

<n>

Description

Disable

Enable

<m>

Description

CLIP not provisioned

CLIP provisioned

Unknown (e.g. no network)

Unsolicited Result codes:

325

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

+CLIP: <number>,<type>

Description

String type

String type phone number of format specified by <type>

<type>

Description

Integer format Type of address octet in integer (refer to GSM 04.08 sub-

clause 10.5.4.7)

Example

AT+CLIP=1

RING

+CLIP: “07747008670”,129,,,“Matt L”,0

18.15 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request calling line

identification restriction

AT+CLIR=[<n>]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CLIR?

• +CLIR: <n>,<m>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CLIR=?

• +CLIR: (list of supported

<n>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 that

allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the

CLI to the called party when originating a call.

Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or

allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment

for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can

revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber without

provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according

GSM 02.81.

The setting shall be per logical channel.

326

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter

setting <n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shall

be used according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0.

Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls

(given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status

of the CLIR service (given in <m>).

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

Note!

On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause “ITU-T

V.25ter dial command”.

<n>

Description

Presentation indicator is used according to the

subscription of the CLIR service

CLIR invocation

CLIR suppression

<m>

Description

CLIR not provisioned

CLIR provisioned in permanent mode

Unknown (e.g. no network)

CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted

CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed

327

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

18.16 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Presentation of

notification result

codes from TA to TE

AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show the current

setting

AT+CSSN?

• +CSSN: <n>,<m>

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CSSN=?

• +CSSN: (list of

supported <n>s),(list

of supported <m>s)

• +CME ERROR <err>

• OK

• ERROR

This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated

notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of

notification result codes from TA to TE.

When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after

a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI:

<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result

codes presented in this ETS or in V.25ter. When several different

<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its

own +CSSI result code.

When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received

during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward

check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result

code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call

setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command

“Calling line identification presentation +CLIP”) and when several

different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall

have its own +CSSU result code.

Note!

The difference between <index> and <cindex> is that <index> is a

position mark while <cindex> is a unique value for each CUG. <index>

is not supported.

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

<n>

Description

Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA

Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA

328

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

<m>

Description

Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA

Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA

<code1>

Description

Unconditional call forwarding is active

Some of the conditional call forwarding are active

Call has been forwarded

Call is waiting

This is a CUG call (also <index> present)

Outgoing calls are barred

Incoming calls are barred

CLIR suppression rejected

<index>

Description

0…9

CUG index

No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)

<code2>

Description

This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)

This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)

Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)

Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)

Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)

Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS

notification) (during a voice call)

Forward check SS message received (can be received

whenever)

Incoming call has been forwarded

329

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

18.17 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data

Description

Command

Possible Responses

Request unstructured

supplementary service

data

AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>]]

• +CME ERROR: <err>

• OK

Show the current

setting

AT+CUSD?

• +CUSD: <n>

• OK

• ERROR

Show if the command

is supported

AT+CUSD=?

• +CUSD: (list of

supported <n>s)

• OK

• ERROR

This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary

Service Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and

mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to

disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD

response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD:

<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel

an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0

is taken.

When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response

USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The

response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent

unsolicited +CUSD: result code.

The interaction of this command with other commands based on other

GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.

Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound

value.

Some different scenarios are shown below:

• An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to

the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the

external application has enabled result code presentation.

• An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the

external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the

external application has enabled result code.

• If the external application answers to the request with the command

AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.

• A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the

external application.

330

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES

The different alternatives are shown below.

Network

Mobile Equipment

External application

Signal

Sends unsolicited

result code +CUSD

Result code presentation

enabled, presented

Signal asking

for reply

Sends unsolicited

result code +CUSD

Result code presentation

enabled, presented

Answer AT+CUSD

Sends AT+CUSD

<n>

Description

Disable result code presentation in the TA

Enable result code presentation in the TA

Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to

the read command response

<str>

Description

string

String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not

interrogated):

-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used:

*if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select TE

Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into

current TE character set according to rules of

GSM 07.05 Annex A

Example 1

AT Command

Result Code

Description

AT+CUSD=1,“*34#”

Enable the Result Code

presentation in the TAE

and send a USSD-

request

+CUSD:1,“id code” OK

+CUSD:0 OK

Further user action

required, give id code

AT+CUSD=1,“7465338”

Id code given

No further user action

required

331

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

Example 2

Example 3

AT Command

Result Code

Description

+CUSD:0,“Expensive

incoming call”

Incoming USSD-notify telling

the user that the incoming call

is expensive

AT Command

AT+CUSD=1,“*55*0700#”

Result Code

Description

Enable the Result Code

presentation in the TAE

and send a USSD-request

asking for an alarm at the

time 07:00

+CUSD:0,“ALARM”

At 07:00 the network

sends an alarm to the user

Example 4

AT+CUSD=1,“*#100#”

+CUSD: 0,"07787154042"

332

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

19. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands

AT Command

Description

Page No.

Attention Command

AT&C

Circuit 109 (DCD) Control

AT&D

Circuit 108 (DTR) Response

AT&F

Set to Factory Defined Configuration

Circuit 107 (DSR) response

AT&S

AT&W

Store User Profile

AT*

List all Supported AT Commands

M2M Audio Profile Manipulation

Ericsson M2M Cell Description

Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification

Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode

M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time

Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification

Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write

Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS

AT*E2APR

AT*E2CD

AT*E2EAMS

AT*E2EMM

AT*E2ESC

AT*E2FAX

AT*E2IO

AT*E2NBTS

AT*E2NMPR

AT*E2PBCS

AT*E2PHFB

AT*E2SMSRI

AT*E2SPI

AT*E2SPN

AT*E2SSD

AT*E2SSI

AT*E2SSN

AT*E2STKC

AT*E2STKD

AT*E2STKG

AT*E2STKI

Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate

Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum

Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable

Ring Indicator for SMS

Serial Peripheral Interface

M2M Service Provider Indication

M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch

M2M Supplementary Service Indications

Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number

M2M STK Set Up Call

M2M STK Display Text

M2M STK Get Inkey

M2M STK Get Input

333

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

AT Command

Description

Page No.

AT*E2STKL

AT*E2STKM

AT*E2STKN

AT*E2STKS

AT*E2STKTO

AT*EALR

AT*EALS

AT*EAMS

AT*EARS

AT*ECAM

AT*ECAR

AT*ECAW

AT*ECPI

M2M STK Select Item

M2M STK Set Up Menu

M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)

SIM Application Toolkit Settings

Ericsson Audio Line Request

Ericsson Request ALS Status

Ericsson Audio Mode Selection

Ericsson Audio Ring Signal

Ericsson Call Monitoring

Ericsson Callers Allowed Read

Ericsson Callers Allowed Write

Ciphering Indicator

AT*ECSP

AT*EDIF

Ericsson Customer Service Profile

Ericsson Divert Function

AT*EDST

Ericsson Daylight Saving Time

NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2

Ericsson Group Item Read

Identity Presentation Set

AT*EENMEA

AT*EGIR

AT*EIPS

AT*ELAM

AT*ELIN

Ericsson Local Audio Mode

Ericsson Line Set

AT*EMAR

AT*EMIC

AT*EMIR

AT*EPEE

Ericsson Master Reset

Ericsson Microphone Mode

Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request

Ericsson Pin Event

AT*EPNR

AT*EPNW

AT*EPRR

AT*EPRW

AT*ERIL

Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network

Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network

Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read

Ericsson Personal Ring Type Write

Ericsson Ring Level Set

AT*ERIN

Ericsson Ring Set

AT*ERIP

Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command

Ericsson Add to Group

AT*ESAG

334

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

19. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS

AT Command

Description

Page No.

AT*ESCG

Ericsson Create Group

AT*ESCN

Ericsson Set Credit Card Number

Ericsson Delete Group

AT*ESDG

AT*ESDI

Ericsson Delete Group Item

Ericsson Group Read

AT*ESGR

AT*ESIL

Ericsson Silence Command

Ericsson Set Line Name

AT*ESLN

AT*ESMA

Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound

Ericsson Settings Minute Minder

Ericsson Settings Number

Ericsson Settings Own Melody

Ericsson Set External Volume Control

Accumulated Call Meter

Set Alarm

AT*ESMM

AT*ESNU

AT*ESOM

AT*EXVC

AT+CACM

AT+CALA

AT+CALD

AT+CAMM

AT+CAOC

AT+CBST

Alarm Delete

Accumulated Call Meter Maximum

Advice of Charge

Select Bearer Service Type

Call Forwarding Number and Conditions

Set Clock and Date

AT+CCFC

AT+CCLK

AT+CCWA

AT+CEER

Call Waiting

Extended Error Report

AT+CFUN

AT+CGACT

AT+CGATT

AT+CGDATA

AT+CGDCONT

AT+CGEREP

AT+CGMI

AT+CGMM

AT+CGMR

AT+CGPADDR

AT+CGQMIN

Set Phone Functionality

PDP Context Activate or Deactivate

GPRS Attach or Detach

Enter Data State

Define PDP Context

GPRS Event Reporting

Read MS Manufacturer Identification

Read MS Model Identification

Read MS Revision Identification

Show PDP Address

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)

335

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

AT Command

Description

Page No.

AT+CGQREQ

AT+CGREG

AT+CGSMS

AT+CGSN

AT+CHLD

AT+CHSC

AT+CHSD

AT+CHSN

AT+CHSR

AT+CHSU

AT+CHUP

AT+CIMI

Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

GPRS Network Registration Status

Select Service for MO SMS Messages

Read MS Product Serial Number Identification

Call Hold and Multiparty

HSCSD Current Call Parameters

HSCSD Device Parameters

HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration

HSCSD Parameters Report

HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading

Hang Up Call

Subscriber Identification

Indicator Control

AT+CIND

AT+CLAC

AT+CLCK

AT+CLIP

List All Available AT Commands

Facility Lock

Calling Line Identification

Calling Line Identification Restriction

Mobile Equipment Error

AT+CLIR

AT+CMEE

AT+CMER

AT+CMGC

AT+CMGD

AT+CMGF

AT+CMGL

AT+CMGR

AT+CMGS

AT+CMGW

AT+CMOD

AT+CMSS

AT+CMUX

AT+CNMI

AT+CNUM

AT+COLP

AT+COPS

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting

Send Command

Delete Message

Message Format

List Message

Read Message

Send Message

Write Message to Memory

Call Mode

Send From Storage

Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol

New Message Indications to TE

Subscriber Number

Connected Line Identification on Presentation

Operator Selection

336

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

19. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS

AT Command

Description

Page No.

AT+CPAS

AT+CPBF

AT+CPBR

AT+CPBS

AT+CPBW

AT+CPIN

AT+CPMS

AT+CPUC

AT+CPWD

AT+CR

Phone Activity Status

Phonebook Find

Phonebook Read

Phone Storage

Phonebook Write

PIN Control

Preferred Message Storage

Price Per Unit and Currency Table

Change Password

Service Reporting Control

Cellular Result Code

AT+CRC

AT+CREG

AT+CRES

AT+CRLP

AT+CSAS

AT+CSCA

AT+CSCB

AT+CSCS

AT+CSDH

AT+CSMP

AT+CSMS

AT+CSQ

AT+CSSN

AT+CTZU

AT+CUSD

AT+CVHU

AT+F___

Network Registration

Restore SMS Settings

Radio Link Protocol

Save Settings

Service Centre Address

Select Cell Broadcast Message Type

Select Character Set

Show Text Mode Parameters

Set Text Mode Parameters

Select Message Service

Signal Strength

Supplementary Service Notification

Automatic Time Zone Update

Unstructured Supplementary Service Data

Voice Hang-Up

Low Level Fax Commands

Read Manufacturer Identification

Read Model Identification

Read Revision Identification

Cable Interface Character Format

DTE-DCE Local Flow Control

Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting

AT+GMI

AT+GMM

AT+GMR

AT+ICF

AT+IFC

AT+ILRR

337

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL

AT Command

Description

Page No.

AT+IPR

AT+VTS

AT+WS46

ATA

Cable Interface Port Command

DTMF and Tone Generation

Mode Selection

204

198

Answer

ATD

Dial

ATE

Command Echo

198

ATH

Hang up

ATI

Identification Information

Monitor Speaker Loudness

Monitor Speaker Control

Return to Online Data Mode

Select Pulse Dialling

188

ATL

ATM

ATO

ATP

151

ATQ

ATS0

ATS2

ATS3

ATS4

ATS5

ATS6

ATS7

ATS8

ATS10

ATT

Result Code Suppression

Automatic Answer Control

Escape Sequence Character

Command Line Termination Character

Response Formatting Character

Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)

Blind Dial Delay Control

Connection Completion Timeout

Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control

Automatic Disconnect Delay Control

Select Tone Dialling

ATV

DCE Response Format

199

ATX

Call Progress Monitoring Control

Reset to Default Configuration

ATZ

200

Unsolicited

Description

Page No.

Result Code

*E2STKE

*E2STKP

*E2STKR

*E2STKU

STK Send Short Message

STK Send SS

STK Refresh

STK Send USSD

338

LZT 123 7263 R1C

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shop Vac Vacuum Cleaner 86L650 User Manual
Sigma Projector 130Ci User Manual
Snapper Snow Blower 6 1811 User Manual
Sony Camera Lens VCLHG0725 User Manual
Sony Computer Monitor SSM 121 User Manual
Sony Home Theater System DAV DZ10 User Manual
Sony Stereo Receiver STR DH740 User Manual
Spectec Computer Network Card Video Out Card User Manual
Stow Music Mixer CMS 6S User Manual
SVA Flat Panel Television VR1701 User Manual